JP2021052993A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To inhibit a player from feeling discomfort when resuming a game after a game machine returns from a power interruption state.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: determination means for determining whether or not to perform a special game on the basis of establishment of a start condition; and performance control means for performing variation performance of stopping a drawing pattern on which variation display is performed after temporarily stopping the drawing pattern, depending on a result of determination. When the game machine turns into a power interruption state and returns from the power interruption state during execution of variation performance in the case that execution of the special game is determined, the performance control means terminates variation performance in execution without temporarily stopping a drawing pattern associated with the variation performance in execution.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 67-1

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

In the gaming machine, for example, Patent Document 1 describes that when the pachinko gaming machine recovers from a power failure, it starts the operation in the initial state regardless of the operation before the power is cut off.

JP-A-2010-194337

By the way, the game machine may be turned off during the execution of the game by the player due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary interruption. In this case, when the gaming machine returns from the power off state, the player may resume the game.
An object of the present invention is to prevent a player who resumes a game from feeling uncomfortable after returning from a power-off state of the game machine.

The present invention that achieves the above object is realized as the following gaming machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) responds to the determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result of the determination. The gaming machine is provided with an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for temporarily stopping and then stopping a variable display symbol (for example, a decorative symbol 41). The control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) puts the gaming machine into a power-off state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 67-1 (4)) during the execution of the variation effect when it is determined that the special game is to be performed. When returning after that, the variation effect (for example, FIG. 67-1 (6)) being executed is not temporarily stopped without temporarily stopping the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol 41) related to the variation effect being executed. ) Is a game machine characterized by ending.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned reference numerals in this column are exemplarily attached in the description of the present invention, and the present invention is not reduced by these reference numerals.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a player who resumes the game after returning from the power off state of the game machine from feeling uncomfortable.

It is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. (A) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display provided at the lower left of the game board, and (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing of the image / sound control part and the lamp control part of this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the game control part of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of the basic processing by a game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of the processing at the time of power-off by a game control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of a game control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the start port switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the gate switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the special symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the processing during stop. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of ordinary symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the big prize opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the electric tulip processing. It is a figure which shows the composition example of the random number used in this embodiment, (a) is a figure which shows the composition example of a jackpot random number, (b) is a figure which shows the composition example of a jackpot symbol random number, (c ) Is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reach random number, and (d) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a hit random number. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the variation pattern and the table used in the variation pattern selection process. It is a block diagram explaining the structure example of the RAM of the game control part, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of a storage area, (b) is a block diagram which shows each structure of the storage part shown in (a). Is. It is a block diagram explaining the structure example of the RAM of the effect control part, (a) is a block diagram which shows the structure of the hold storage area, (b) is a block which shows each structure of the storage part shown in (a). It is a figure. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the preliminary determination processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of a command, (a) is a figure which shows the data structure of a command, (b) is a figure which shows the structure as a bit string of a command. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the command storage area in RAM. It is a flowchart which shows the content of output processing by an output control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the operation of an effect control part, (a) is a figure which shows the main process, (b) is a figure which shows the interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a command reception process. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process of FIG. 27. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the jackpot effect selection process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the ending effect selection process of FIG. 27. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the effect button processing. It is an exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the main process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting change processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the performance display data setting processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the display information of the information display in each game section. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources after a setting change. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources after the setting confirmation. It is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of the 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the setting change process in the main control board of the 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the RWM clear processing in the main control board of the 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the setting confirmation process in the main control board of the 1st modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources while changing a setting. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources during setting confirmation. It is an operation comparison table at various operation timings of various drive sources. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of the 2nd modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources after clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of the 3rd modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources during preparation for clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the initial setting process in the main control board of the 4th modification. It is a figure which shows the specific example at the time of initial operation of various drive sources after clearing RWM. It is a figure which shows the setting example of the variation effect pattern table used in the variation effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 28 (b). It is a figure which shows the setting example of the variation effect pattern table used in the variation effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 28 (b). It is a figure which showed an example of the processing performed by the game control unit and the effect control unit when the pachinko game machine returns from the power off state. It is a figure which showed an example of the processing performed by the game control unit and the effect control unit when the pachinko game machine returns from the power off state. It is a figure which showed an example of the processing performed by the game control unit and the effect control unit when the pachinko game machine returns from the power off state. It is a figure which showed an example of the processing performed by the game control unit and the effect control unit when the pachinko game machine returns from the power off state. It is a figure which showed an example of the processing performed by the game control unit and the effect control unit when the pachinko game machine returns from the power off state. The period from when the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine is resolved to the display of the customer waiting image in process example 1 and the customer waiting image is displayed after the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine is resolved in process example 2. It is explanatory drawing of the period until it is done. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure which shows the modification of the variation effect example 6. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production in a jackpot game. It is a figure which shows the example of the non-initialization test operation processing at the time of operation failure of a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows the example of the non-initialization test operation processing at the time of operation failure of a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows the example of the non-initialization test operation processing at the time of operation failure of a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows the example of the non-initialization test operation processing at the time of operation failure of a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows one aspect of the variation effect of a decorative pattern performed by an effect control unit using an image display unit. It is a figure explaining the event when a signal line becomes unconnected. It is a figure explaining the event when a signal line becomes unconnected. It is a figure explaining the event when a signal line becomes unconnected.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of game machine]
FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment.
The pachinko game machine 100 as an example of the game machine shown in FIG. 1 is configured to pay out a prize ball when a game ball launched by a player's instruction operation wins a prize. The pachinko gaming machine 100 includes a game board 110 on which a game ball is launched, and a frame member 150 surrounding the game board 110. The game board 110 is detachably attached to the frame member 150.

The game board 110 has, on the front surface, a game area 111 for playing a game with a game ball, a rail member 112 on which a game ball launched from below rises and forms a passage toward an upper position of the game area 111, and a game. A guide member 113 for guiding the game ball is provided on the right side of the region 111.
In the present embodiment, an image display unit 114 for displaying various images for production is provided at a position of the game area 111 that is easily visible to the player. The image display unit 114 is provided with a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and as the game progresses by the player, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the symbol lottery result (symbol change result) can be displayed. It displays an effect image due to the appearance of a character or an item, or an effect image using the hold display described later.
Further, on the front surface of the game board 110, three movable accessories 115 and a board lamp 116 used for various effects are provided. The three movable accessories 115 are arranged so as to be arranged in the left-right direction. When each of the three movable accessories 115 is described individually, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the left side is referred to as "left movable accessory 115A". Further, the movable accessory 115 arranged in the center is referred to as a "medium movable accessory 115B". Further, the movable accessory 115 arranged on the right side is referred to as "right movable accessory 115C". Further, when each of the three movable accessories 115 is not particularly distinguished, it is simply referred to as a movable accessory 115. The movable accessory 115 performs various effects by operating on the game board 110. In addition, the board lamp 116 emits light to produce various effects.

The game area 111 is provided with a game nail, a windmill, and the like (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls. Further, in the game area 111, various accessories related to winning a prize or a lottery are provided at predetermined positions. Further, the game area 111 is provided with an out port 117 that discharges a game ball launched into the game area 111 that has not won a prize in the winning port to the outside of the game area 111.

In the present embodiment, as various accessories related to winning and lottery, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 where the special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) starts when the game ball wins, and the second starting port 122 when the game ball passes are normal. A starting gate (hereinafter, simply referred to as a gate) 124 at which a symbol lottery (opening / closing lottery) is started is provided on the game board 110. In FIG. 1, gates 124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area 111, the gate 124 on the left side is described as 124L, and the gate 124 on the right side is described as 124R. Further, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 referred to here refer to winning openings that trigger the operation of the predetermined special symbol display 1. Specifically, the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 are provided with switches (first starting port switch 211 and second starting port switch 212, which will be described later) that detect the passage of a game ball at the time of winning a prize. Has been done. Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 121 or the second start port 122, the switch detects the passage of the game ball, which triggers the operation of the special symbol display. Further, the game board 110 is provided with a light emitting unit 137 that emits light. The light emitting unit 137 is provided around the first starting port 121. The light emitting unit 137 has an LED light source capable of lighting in a predetermined light emitting color, and is controlled by the effect control unit 300.

The second starting port 122 includes an electric tulip (opening / closing member) 123 as a normal electric accessory that opens and closes and lights up a pair of tulip flower-shaped blades by an electric solenoid. In the electric tulip 123, when the blades are closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 122, while when the blades are opened, the entrance of the second starting port 122 expands and the game ball moves to the second starting port 122. It is configured to be easy to enter. Then, when the electric tulip 123 wins the ordinary symbol lottery, the blades open for a specified time (for example, 0.15 seconds to 1.8 seconds) and a specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) while lighting or blinking.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 has, as a gaming state, a low probability state in which the winning probability is low and a high probability state in which the winning probability is higher than the low probability state, based on the winning probability of the jackpot lottery. Then, it is controlled to either a low probability state or a high probability state based on a predetermined condition such as a big hit or a lottery number of special symbol lottery.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has two types of gaming states: an electric support state in which there are few chances of winning a prize in the second starting port 122, and an electric support state in which there are more chances of winning a prize in the second starting port 122 than in a state without electric support. have. Then, under predetermined conditions such as, for example, triggered by the number of lottery of a big hit or a special symbol lottery, the state is controlled to be either a state without electric support or a state with electric support. The electric support state is, for example, one or more of shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, and increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. It is a gaming state controlled by the combination.
Further, the pachinko gaming machine 100 has a time-saving state in which the special symbol variation time is long and a time-saving state in which the special symbol variation time is shorter than the time-saving non-state.
In this embodiment, the electric support state and the time saving state are controlled at the same time. Further, in the following description, the electric support state and the time saving state are simply referred to as the time saving state, and the electric support non-state and the time saving non-state are simply referred to as the time saving non-state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as other accessories related to winning and lottery, a large winning opening 125 as a special electric accessory that opens according to the result of the special symbol lottery and a lottery even if the game ball wins are performed. A normal winning opening 126 and a non-normal winning opening 126 are provided in the game board 110. The large winning opening 125 is provided with a large winning opening door 125D that opens and closes the large winning opening 125. In the following description, the opening / closing state and opening / closing operation of the large winning opening door 125D may be described as the opening / closing state and opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 125 for convenience.
In the present embodiment, a display 130 for displaying the determination result and the number of holdings is provided at the lower left position of the game board 110.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 110, a game control board for determining the winning of a special symbol, an effect control board for comprehensively controlling the effect, an image control board for controlling the effect by images and sounds, various lamps, and the like. Various substrates (not shown) such as a lamp control substrate that controls the effect of the movable accessory 115 are attached. Further, on the back surface of the game board 110, a switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power supply into a DC power supply and outputs it to various boards or the like is provided.

When the player touches the handle 151 to rotate the lever 152 clockwise, the frame member 150 causes the game balls to be hit at a predetermined time interval (for example, 100 pieces per minute) with a striking force according to the operation angle. It is equipped with a launcher (not shown) that launches electrically at. Further, the frame member 150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the launcher one by one at a timing linked to an operation by the player's lever 152, and a game ball that the supply device supplies to the launcher. It is equipped with a plate 153 for temporarily storing. For example, a payout ball by a payout unit is paid out to the plate 153.
In the present embodiment, the plate 153 is integrally formed with the upper and lower plates, but a configuration example in which the upper plate and the lower plate are separated can also be considered. Further, a configuration example in which the handle 151 of the launching device is made to emit light under a predetermined condition is also conceivable.

Further, the frame member 150 has a stop button 154 for temporarily stopping the firing of the game ball even when the player is touching the handle 151 of the launching device, and the game ball accumulated in the plate 153. It is provided with an eject button 155 for dropping it into a box (not shown) and ejecting it.
Further, the frame member 150 includes a speaker 156 and a frame lamp 157 for notifying the gaming state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 and performing various effects. The speaker 156 performs various effects by music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp 157 is composed of a light emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects by light depending on a pattern due to lighting / blinking and a difference in light emission color. As for the frame lamp 157, a configuration example that enables an effect of changing the light irradiation direction can be considered.
Further, the frame member 150 includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board 110 from the player.

FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2A is an enlarged view showing an example of a display 130 provided at the lower left of the gaming board 110. 2 (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine 100.
As shown in FIG. 2A, the display 130 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 wins the first special symbol display 221 and the second starting port 122, which operate in response to the winning of the first starting port 121. It includes a second special symbol display 222 that operates in response to the passage of the gate 124, and a normal symbol display 223 that operates in response to the passage of the gate 124. The first special symbol display 221 displays the determination result by displaying the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the winning of the first starting port 121. The second special symbol display 222 displays the determination result by displaying the special symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display based on the winning of the second starting port 122. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the normal symbol display 223 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner and then stops and displays the determination result. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the determination result of the special symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof. Similarly, the ordinary symbol display 223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the determination result of the ordinary symbol lottery is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the display 130 operates in response to the hold on the first special symbol display 221 and the first special symbol hold display 218 and the second special symbol display 222. 2 The special symbol hold indicator 219 and the normal symbol hold indicator 220 that operate in response to the hold on the normal symbol indicator 223 are provided. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the ordinary symbol hold indicator 220 are each composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of holds is determined by the lighting mode thereof. Is displayed.

In the display 130 of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display 221 performs variable display of the special symbol by, for example, blinking a plurality of (7 in the present embodiment) LEDs all at once in synchronization. .. It should be noted that the blinking cycle of the plurality of LEDs does not change and is constant from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop of the fluctuation in the first special symbol display 221.

Then, the first special symbol display 221 expresses the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol by, for example, maintaining the state in which the LED at a predetermined position among the plurality of LEDs is turned on for a certain period of time.
When the determination result of the special symbol lottery is wrong, the first special symbol display 221 turns on only one LED at the end of the plurality of LEDs, for example. On the other hand, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the first special symbol display 221 lights a plurality of LEDs in a predetermined lighting pattern. When the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the first special symbol display 221 displays a different lighting pattern according to the type of the symbol when the big hit is won.
The second special symbol display 222 performs the same operation as the first special symbol display 221 based on the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 122.

Here, the hold will be described. If a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 during the variable display operation of the special symbol (while the variable display for one winning is being performed), the special symbol is changing. In addition, it is not possible to start the variable display operation of the special symbol based on the later winning. Therefore, the later winnings are stored up to the specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start the special symbol for the winning game ball is until the variable display operation for the first winning game ball is completed. It is put on hold.
It should be noted that the same processing as for the special symbol is performed for the normal symbol. The fact that such a hold is made and the number of holds (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the ordinary symbol hold indicator 220.

Further, the display 130 includes a state display 224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the present embodiment, the status display 224 is composed of a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs lights up to notify whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. The other one is to notify by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a time-saving state in which the special symbol fluctuation time is short. Still another one is to notify by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state by hitting right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball).

Further, the display 130 includes a round number display 225 that displays the number of rounds when the big winning opening 125 is operated in the big hit game performed according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. The jackpot game will be described later. The round number display 225 is composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of operating rounds of the big winning opening 125 in the big hit game is displayed depending on the lighting mode thereof.

Further, the display 130 includes a state confirmation display 226. The status confirmation display 226 is composed of one LED and is for indicating that the setting change mode described later or the setting confirmation mode described later is set. When the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the LED is used. Starts lighting, and turns off the LED when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends. In this way, since the status confirmation indicator 226 indicating that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not it has been done. The status confirmation indicator 226 may be installed in front of (the surface) of the pachinko gaming machine 100, or may be installed in another place.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode (lighting display) is the same regardless of which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is set, but which mode is set? May be displayed recognizable. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 226 may be lit and displayed, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 226 may be blinked. And vice versa.

Further, in the present embodiment, the status confirmation display 226 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the second special symbol hold indicator 219, and the status indicator 224 Since the round number indicator 225 and the like are turned off, one or a plurality of LEDs of these indicators may be turned on.

The frame member 150 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an input device for the player to input an effect. As shown in FIG. 2B, in the present embodiment, as an example of the input device, an effect button 161 and an effect key 162 adjacent to the effect button 161 and composed of a plurality of keys arranged in a substantially cross shape are used. Is provided on the frame member 150. In the illustrated example, consider a case where an effect of accepting an operation of selecting one image from a plurality of images is performed. In this case, for example, the player operates the effect key 162 composed of four keys arranged in a cross shape to instruct one of the plurality of images displayed on the image display unit 114, and presses the effect button 161. By operating it, it is possible to perform an effect such as selecting an instructed image. Further, as the form of the input device, in addition to the illustrated effect button 161 and effect key 162, various input forms such as a lever and a handle can be adopted depending on the content of the effect and the like.
Further, the effect button 161 of the present embodiment is provided so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the protruding state protruding upward and the non-protruding state not protruding.

[Control unit configuration]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control unit of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment.
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of an image / acoustic control unit and a lamp control unit according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control unit includes a game control unit 200 as a main control means, which determines whether or not a special symbol has been won. Further, as sub-control means, an effect control unit 300 that comprehensively controls the effect and a payout control unit 330 that controls the payout of payout balls are provided.

[Configuration / function of game control unit]
The game control unit 200 is used as a CPU 201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining the winning of a special symbol, a ROM 202 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 201, and a working memory of the CPU 201. RAM 203 and

The game control unit 200 controls the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 in either a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving no state, or a time-saving state. As a result, the gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine 100 are the high-probability time-saving game state, which is the high-probability state and the time-saving state, the low-probability time-saving game state, which is the low-probability state and the time-saving state, and the high-probability state and the time-saving non-state. It is one of a low-probability time-saving no-game state, a low-probability state, and a low-probability time-saving no-game state. Then, the game control unit 200 switches between a high-probability state and a low-probability state based on a predetermined condition such as a jackpot or a lottery number of special symbol lottery as described above, and switches between a time-saving state and a time-saving state. Switch. Further, the game control unit 200 controls such as making the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery higher, shortening the normal symbol fluctuation time, extending the opening time of the electric tulip 123, etc. in the time saving state than in the time saving state. I do.

The game control unit 200 acquires a random number value used in the special symbol lottery when the game ball wins a prize in the first start port 121 or the second start port 122. Then, the game control unit 200 performs a special symbol lottery using the acquired random number value, and performs a special game such as a big hit game according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery. In a special game, the game control unit 200 wins a round in which the special electric accessory, the large winning opening 125, is maintained in an open state until a closing condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won). It is controlled to repeat a predetermined number of times according to the symbol (type). Then, the game control unit 200 controls the opening / closing operation interval when the big winning opening 125 opens.

Further, the game control unit 200 acquires a random number value used in the normal symbol lottery when the game ball passes through the gate 124. Then, the game control unit 200 performs a normal symbol lottery using the acquired random number value, and controls the operation of the electric tulip 123 according to the determination result of the normal symbol lottery.
In addition, the game control unit 200 holds the game ball when the game ball wins the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 during the special symbol change, or the game ball passes through the gate 124 during the normal symbol change. Set the hold that occurs as a result.
Further, the game control unit 200 accompanies game control such as determination results of special symbol lottery and normal symbol lottery, change information of high probability state and low probability state, change information of time saving non state and time saving state, hold setting information, and the like. The information is sent to the effect control unit 300 by a command described later.

Further, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 121, the second starting port 122, the large winning opening 125, and the normal winning opening 126, the game control unit 200 hits one game ball according to the place where the game ball wins. An instruction is given to the payout control unit 330 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, if a game ball wins in the first starting port 121, three prize balls, if a game ball wins in the second starting port 122, four prize balls, and if a game ball wins in the large winning opening 125, 13 prizes. When a game ball wins a ball or a normal winning opening 126, an instruction command (command) is sent to the payout control unit 330 so that 10 prize balls are paid out respectively. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate 124, the payout control unit 330 is not instructed to pay out the prize ball linked to the game ball.
When the payout control unit 330 pays out the prize balls according to the instruction of the game control unit 200, the game control unit 200 acquires information regarding the number of paid out prize balls from the payout control unit 330. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out is managed.

As a detection means, the game control unit 200 includes a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW)) 211 that detects the winning of the game ball to the first start port 121. , To the second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) 212 for detecting the winning of the game ball to the second start port 122, the electric tulip opening / closing unit 213 for opening / closing the electric tulip 123, and the gate 124. A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214 for detecting the passage of the game ball is connected to the gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) 214.
Further, the game control unit 200 includes a large winning opening detection unit (large winning opening switch (SW)) 215 for detecting the winning of a game ball into the large winning opening 125, and a large winning opening door 125D of the large winning opening 125. The large winning opening door opening / closing part 216 that sets the closed state and the protruding inclined open state, and the normal winning opening detection unit (normal winning opening switch (SW)) 217 that detects the winning of the game ball to the ordinary winning opening 126. , An out ball detection switch (SW) 227 for detecting an out ball composed of a game ball flowing into the out port 117 is connected.

In addition, the game control unit 200 has a first special symbol hold indicator 218 that displays the number of unchanged pieces that have won a prize in the first start port 121 during the change of the special symbol, and a second special symbol hold indicator 218 that displays the number of unchanged items that have been won. The second special symbol hold indicator 219 that displays the number of unchanging holdings that won the starting port 122, and the normal symbol holding indicator that displays the number of unchanging holdings that passed through the gate 124 while the normal symbol was changing. 220 and are connected.
Further, the game control unit 200 has a first special symbol display 221 for displaying the variation display of the special symbol and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to the first starting port 121, and a second starting port. The second special symbol display 222 that displays the variation display of the special symbol and the result of the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to 122, and the normal symbol display that displays the variation display of the normal symbol and the result of the ordinary symbol lottery. The device 223, the state display 224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the round number display 225, and the state confirmation display 226 are connected.

Further, the game control unit 200 is a RAM clear switch that inputs a signal for clearing the stored contents of the RAM 203 or updating a set value (probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination) at the stage of the advantage of the game. It is possible to grasp the actual performance of the (SW) 228, the setting key switch (SW) 229 for inputting a signal for shifting to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described later by the operation using the setting key, and the pachinko gaming machine 100. The information display 230 for displaying the performance information and the set value to be used is connected to the information display 230.

The information display 230 is composed of four 7-segment displays arranged in the left-right direction. Then, the identification segment for displaying the identification information indicating the type (data type) of the performance information is configured by the two 7-segment displays from the left, and the set values and the numerical values of the performance information are configured by the two 7-segment displays from the right. A numerical segment for displaying numerical information indicating the above is configured (see FIG. 40).

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected to a launch control unit 250 that drives the launch device to control the launch of the game ball.
The launch control unit 250 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input / output port, and the like. A ball feed solenoid 251, a touch sensor 252, a firing volume 253, a firing solenoid 254, and the like are connected to the input / output port of the firing control unit 250. When the launch control unit 250 detects that the player's hand is touching the handle 151 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 252, the launch control unit 250 allows the ball feed solenoid 251 and the launch solenoid 254 to be energized, and the launch volume is increased. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the handle 151 has changed by the detection signal from 253, the ball feed solenoid 251 is driven and the launch solenoid 254 is driven so as to have a firing strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 151. The game balls are fired (99.9 pieces / minute).

Then, the first start port switch 211, the second start port switch 212, the gate switch 214, the large winning opening switch 215, the normal winning opening switch 217, the out ball detection switch 227, the RAM clear switch 228, the setting key switch 229, and the firing. The detection signal detected by the control unit 250 is sent to the game control unit 200. Further, the control signals from the game control unit 200 are the electric tulip opening / closing unit 213, the grand prize opening / closing unit 216, the first special symbol holding indicator 218, the second special symbol holding indicator 219, and the normal symbol holding indicator 220. , The first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222, the normal symbol display 223, the status display 224, the round number display 225, the status confirmation display 226, and the information display 230. As a result, the game control unit 200 performs various controls related to the number of payout prize balls described above.

Further, the game control unit 200 is connected to an external information terminal board 350 for a board that transmits various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall. Then, the game control unit 200 transmits information regarding the number of prize balls paid out, information indicating the state of the game control unit 200, etc. acquired from the payout control unit 330 to the host computer via the external information terminal board 350 for the board. To do.

[Configuration / function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit 330 includes a CPU 331 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the payout of payout balls, a ROM 332 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 331, and a RAM 333 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 331. And have.
Then, the payout control unit 330 controls the payout of the payout ball based on the command sent from the game control unit 200.
Specifically, the payout control unit 330 acquires a command from the game control unit 200 to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won a prize (first starting port 121 or the like). Then, the payout drive unit 334 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls specified in the command. The payout drive unit 334 here is composed of a drive motor that sends out the game ball from the storage unit of the game ball.

Further, the payout control unit 330 includes a payout ball detection unit 335 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit 334, and a game ball in the storage unit (not shown). It detects whether or not the ball presence detection unit 336 that detects the presence or absence of storage of the ball and the plate 153 that holds the game ball used when the player plays the game and the prize ball that has been paid out are in a full state. The full tank detection unit 337 is connected to the full tank detection unit 337. Then, the payout control unit 330 receives the detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, the ball presence detection unit 336, and the full tank detection unit 337, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, a frame external information terminal board 340 for transmitting various information to the host computer installed in the hall is connected to the payout control unit 330. Then, the payout control unit 330, for example, information on the number of prize balls instructed to pay out to the payout drive unit 334, information on the number of actually paid out prize balls detected by the payout ball detection unit 335, and the like. Is transmitted to the host computer via the external information terminal board 340 for the frame. Further, the same information is transmitted to the game control unit 200.

[Structure / function of production control unit]
The effect control unit 300 includes a CPU 301 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effect, a ROM 302 that stores programs and various data executed by the CPU 301, a RAM 303 that is used as a work memory of the CPU 301, and a date and time. It is equipped with a real-time clock (RTC) 304 for measuring.
The effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on, for example, a determination result of winning or not winning in the special symbol lottery sent from the game control unit 200 and a fluctuation pattern. At that time, in some cases, the effect content is set according to the operation input in response to the operation input from the user using the effect button 161 or the effect key 162. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to the operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button 161 and the operation content identified by the operation signal is reflected in the effect setting.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sets the effect content based on the change information of the high-probability state and the low-probability state and the change information of the time-saving non-state and the time-saving state received from the game control unit 200.
Further, the effect control unit 300 sends a command instructing the execution of the set effect content to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320.

Further, the effect control unit 300 is connected to an image / sound control unit 310 that controls an effect using images and sound, and a lamp control unit 320 that controls an effect using various lamps and movable accessories 115. Has been done.

[Configuration / function of image / acoustic control unit]
As shown in FIG. 4, the image / sound control unit 310 stores a CPU 311 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling an image expressing the effect content and sound, a program executed by the CPU 311 and various data. It includes a ROM 312, a RAM 313 used as a working memory of the CPU 311 and the like, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 314, a CGROM 315, an SNDROM 316, and a VRAM 317 used as a working memory of the VDP 314.

Then, the image / sound control unit 310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit 114 and the sound output from the speaker 156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300.
Specifically, the CGROM 315 has a background image to be displayed during the game on the image display unit 114, a decorative pattern for notifying the player of the determination result, a character or item for displaying the notice effect to the player, and the like. Image data is stored. Further, the SNDROM 316 stores various acoustic data such as music and sound to be output from the speaker 156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, and sound effects such as jingles.
The CPU 311 analyzes animation patterns, creates a display list summarizing commands related to drawing, and sends the display list to VDP314 based on the hold number command or the variable effect start command sent from the effect control unit 300. Do.

The VDP 314 reads out the image data and the acoustic data stored in the CGROM 315 and the SNDROM 316, respectively, based on the display list received from the CPU 311. Further, the VDP 314 performs drawing processing for background image display, decorative symbol display, decorative symbol variation, character / item display, etc. using the read image data, and voice processing using the read acoustic data. .. Then, the VDP 314 controls the screen display on the image display unit 114 based on the drawn image data. Further, the VDP 314 controls the sound output from the speaker 156 by the sound processed sound data.
In the present embodiment, the VDP 314 is configured to perform voice processing in addition to the drawing processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a processor dedicated to voice processing may be provided separately.

The functions of the CPU 311 and the VDP 314 and the control in each device will be described more specifically.
In the image / sound control unit 310, the CPU 311 generates a display list that defines the content of the image to be displayed on the image display unit 114 based on the command instructing the execution of the effect content received from the effect control unit 300. , Sends a drawing command containing the generated display list to VDP314. The RAM 313 functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing of the CPU 311 and temporarily stores the data read from the ROM 312.

The VDP 314 is a video processing circuit capable of displaying images (also referred to as effect images) constituting various effects by using a plurality of frames (also referred to as frame images). The VDP 314 generates each frame image using the material image data stored in the CGROM 315 based on the drawing command received from the CPU 311 and continuously displays the generated plurality of frame images on the image display unit 114. Image data (video signal) is transmitted to the image display unit 114. As a result, the image display unit 114 displays a moving image composed of a plurality of frame images arranged in a time series generated by the VDP 314 as an effect image. However, the effect image displayed on the image display unit 114 also includes a still image.

The CGROM 315 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data or the like composed of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 pixels × 32 pixels). The VRAM 317 is used by the VDP 314 as a work area for generating a frame image. The VDP314 generates a clock, a synchronization signal, and the like for displaying an appropriate image about every 16.6 milliseconds.

The VRAM 317 connected to the VDP 314 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for outputting an image to the image display unit 114. The VRAM 317 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage, and in detail, SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The VRAM 317 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is used. Further, the VRAM 317 is provided with a frame buffer in which drawing data is created by the VDP 314. The VRAM 317 may be built in the VDP 314.

The VDP 314 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer using the image data read from the CGROM 315. The drawing data for one frame means the data necessary for displaying the image at one update timing in the configuration in which the image in the image display unit 114 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Here, the frame buffer is provided with a plurality of frame areas a and b. Specifically, a first frame area a and a second frame area b are provided. Each of these frame areas a and b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame areas a and b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to dots (pixels) on the display surface of the image display unit 114 at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color is to be displayed. More specifically, a full-color method is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) at each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each RGB color in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

By providing the first frame area a and the second frame area b in the frame buffer, the display on the image display unit 114 is executed using the drawing data created in one frame area. Creation (drawing) of drawing data scheduled to be displayed in the future (usually the next frame) is executed for other frame areas. That is, the double buffer method is adopted as the frame buffer.

The VDP 314 outputs a V blank signal to the CPU 311 for permitting switching between the first frame area a and the second frame area b approximately every 16.6 milliseconds. Therefore, except for the occurrence of irregular events such as processing omissions, the frame area in which the first frame area a and the second frame area b are usually switched, that is, drawing is executed with one reception of the V blank signal. And the frame area to be displayed will be switched, and the image for one frame will be drawn and the display will be updated. That is, 1000 milliseconds ÷ 16.6 milliseconds = about 60 frames of images are drawn and the display is updated in one second.

Further, the VDP 314 transmits a drawing completion signal to the CPU 311 when the creation (drawing) of the drawing data according to the drawing command received from the CPU 311 is completed in addition to the V blank signal.

Upon receiving the V blank signal, the CPU 311 executes V interrupt processing for switching between the first frame area a and the second frame area b. It should be noted that the switching between the first frame area a and the second frame area b is performed when not only the reception of only the V blank signal but also the reception of the two signals of the V blank signal and the drawing completion signal can be confirmed. Is also good.

[Configuration / function of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit 320 stores a CPU 321 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 and the operation of the movable accessory 115, and a program and various data executed by the CPU 321. It includes a ROM 322 and a RAM 323 used as a working memory of the CPU 321 and the like.
Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls lighting / blinking, emission color, and the like of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the command sent from the effect control unit 300. It also controls the operation of the movable accessory 115.

Specifically, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 contains lighting / blinking pattern data and emission color pattern data (emission pattern) of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 300. Data) is stored. The CPU 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM 322 that corresponds to the command sent from the effect control unit 300. Then, the lamp control unit 320 controls the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
Further, the ROM 322 of the lamp control unit 320 stores the operation pattern data of the movable accessory 115 according to the effect content set by the effect control unit 300. The CPU 321 controls the operation of the movable accessory 115 based on the read operation pattern data.

In the present embodiment, the game control unit 200, the effect control unit 300, the image / sound control unit 310, the lamp control unit 320, and the payout control unit 330 each serve as a main board provided on the rear surface of the game board 110. The game control board, the effect control board as a sub board, the image control board, the lamp control board, and the payout control board are individually configured.
Further, in the configuration example described with reference to FIG. 4, the effect button 161 and the effect key 162 are connected to the effect control unit 300 and controlled by the effect control unit 300, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect button 161 and the effect key 162 may be connected to the lamp control unit 320 and controlled by the lamp control unit 320.

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Subsequently, the functional configuration of the game control unit 200 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the game control unit 200. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control unit 200 includes a random number acquisition unit 231, a normal symbol determination unit 232, a special symbol fluctuation control unit 233, and a special symbol determination unit 234 as functional units for executing various lottery processes. , Ordinary symbol variation control unit 236.
In addition, the game control unit 200 includes a variation pattern selection unit 235 as a functional unit that executes processing associated with a special symbol variation.
Further, the game control unit 200 has a large winning opening operation control unit 237, an electric tulip operation control unit 238, and a prize ball processing unit 239 as functional units that execute data processing related to motion control of various accessories and prize balls. And an output control unit 240 and a random number control unit 241.

The random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value used for the special symbol lottery and a random number value used for the normal symbol lottery. In the case of the random number value used for the special symbol lottery, specifically, on the condition that the game ball wins in the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, the numerical value in a predetermined range is set for each type of random number. One numerical value (random number value) is selected (acquired) from among them. The acquired random number value is used for determination by the special symbol determination unit 234. As will be described in detail later, the random numbers used in the special symbol lottery include a jackpot random number indicating whether or not it is a jackpot, a symbol random number indicating the type of symbol, a variable pattern random number, a reach random number, and the like.
Further, in the case of the random number value used for the ordinary symbol lottery, specifically, one numerical value (random number value) is selected (acquired) from the numerical values in a predetermined range on condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. ). The acquired random number value is usually used for determination by the symbol determination unit 232. As the random numbers used in the ordinary symbol lottery, in addition to the hit random numbers indicating whether or not they are hit, a symbol random number indicating the type of hit, a variable pattern random number, or the like may be set.
The special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222 according to the determination result when the special symbol lottery is performed.

The special symbol determination unit 234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 20, which will be described later, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the determination result of the special symbol lottery is "whether or not it is a big hit" and "a symbol when a big hit is won". "Type" and "whether it is a small hit or a miss when the big hit is not won" are judged. That is, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires a random number value related to the special symbol when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 211 or the second start port switch 212, which is the detection means, and determines the special symbol. Based on the acquired random number value, the unit 234 determines whether or not to perform a special game (big hit game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. The above-mentioned special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) refers to processing by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the special symbol determination unit 234.

Here, the "big hit" is divided into a plurality of types according to the game state generated after the end of the big hit game. Specifically, the type of symbol is determined by the combination of the time-saving no state or the time-saving state, and the high-probability state or the low-probability state. That is, as the types of symbols based on the game state generated after the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot that becomes the high-probability time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game (hereinafter, the jackpot in the high-probability time-saving game state) and the low-probability time-saving game state Big hit (hereinafter, big hit in low probability time saving game state), big hit in high probability time saving no game state (hereinafter, big hit in high probability time saving no game state), big hit in low probability time saving no game state (hereinafter, low) Probability time saving No game state jackpot) is possible. Each of these jackpots is associated with an individual special symbol.

Further, the "big hit" may be divided into a jackpot in which the jackpot game time is long and a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out, and a jackpot in which the jackpot game time is short and the payout of the game balls can hardly be expected. The former is called "long hit" and the latter is called "short hit". For example, in "long hit", a round in which the open state of the large winning opening 125 is maintained until a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls are won) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). Is done. Further, in the "short hit", a round in which the large winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In addition, when the big hit is not won, the "small hit" is a small hit game in which the big winning opening 125 is opened for a certain period of time (for example, 0.9 seconds) a predetermined number of times (for example, twice). Will be done. When the small hit is won, the game state before the small hit is continued even after the small hit game is completed. That is, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state is continued even after the end of the small-hit game, and the game state does not shift. Similarly, when the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit is the low-probability time-saving no-game state, the low-probability time-saving no-game state is continued even after the end of the small-hit game, and the gaming state does not shift.
Further, the "small hit" is a kind of "missing", and none of the above-mentioned gaming states that are advantageous to the player is set.

The variation pattern selection unit 235 selects the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222. Specifically, the variation pattern selection unit 235 can perform a reach effect in the determination result of whether or not to perform the jackpot game and the decorative symbol variation effect accompanying the special symbol variation (for example, 13.5 seconds or more). ), The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the judgment result and the like. Then, the special symbol variation control unit 233 controls the variation of the special symbol based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit 235. Details of the operations of the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 and the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 will be described later.
Here, the "reach" is an effect for making the player expect a big hit in the decorative design described later.

The ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not the determination result of the ordinary symbol is "hit or not" by using a random number table as shown in FIG. 20 (d) described later at the start of the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol. That is, the ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening and closing the electric tulip 123 based on the random number value for the ordinary symbol lottery acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231. Further, when a plurality of types of hits are set in the ordinary symbol lottery, the ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines the "type of hit" when the determination result is a hit. The ordinary symbol lottery is a process performed by the random number acquisition unit 231 and the ordinary symbol determination unit 232.
The normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 controls the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 223 according to the determination result when the normal symbol lottery is performed.
The electric tulip motion control unit 238 opens the electric tulip 123 for a specified time and a specified number of times when the normal symbol lottery determines "hit" by the normal symbol determination unit 232, and a game ball is placed in the second starting port 122. Generate a state that makes it easy to win a prize. Further, when it is determined to be "off", such an open state of the electric tulip 123 is not generated. The operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 will be described later. For example, there are an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds and an operation pattern that opens twice with an opening time of 0.90 seconds.

When the special symbol lottery determines "big hit" by the special symbol determination unit 234, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 has a big winning opening with an operation pattern specified based on the type of the winning symbol as a big hit game. Controls the opening operation of 125. Further, when the special symbol determination unit 234 determines that the special symbol lottery is a "small hit", the large winning opening operation control unit 237 opens the large winning opening 125 as a small hit game for a specified time and a specified number of times. .. For example, there is an operation pattern in which the large winning opening 125 opens twice with an opening time of 0.90 seconds.
The prize ball processing unit 239 sets a command for managing the number of prizes for various prizes related to prizes and lottery, and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prizes.
The output control unit 240 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 and the payout control unit 330.
The random number control unit 241 updates various random number values acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 at a predetermined timing.

[Basic operation of the game machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
When the power is turned on, the game control unit 200 of the pachinko gaming machine 100 executes basic processing (restoration processing) at startup. Then, after performing the basic processing, the game control unit 200 repeatedly executes the main control processing, which is a series of processing related to the progress of the game. Further, when the power is cut off, the game control unit 200 executes a series of power cut-off processes.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the operation of the basic processing by the game control unit 200.
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned on, the game control unit 200 first permits access to the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) (step (hereinafter, step is referred to as “S”) 601). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 228 for clearing the RAM 203 is ON (S602).
When the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF (No in S602), the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the backup flag related to the operation when the power is cut off is ON (S603).
When the backup flag is ON (Yes in S603), the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the checksum created when the power is cut off is normal (S604).
When the checksum is normal (Yes in S604), the game control unit 200 then executes the return process (S605). In this return process, the game control unit 200 sets sub-control means such as the effect control unit 300 when returning from the state in which the power supply is cut off. Specifically, the game control unit 200 is in a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is cut off (whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, either a high-probability state or a low-probability state, a time-saving state and a time-saving no state). A command for setting the sub control means is output to the effect control unit 300 so as to reflect any of the above). Further, in this return process, the game control unit 200 turns off the backup flag.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 228 is ON (Yes in S602), the backup flag is OFF (No in S603), or the checksum is abnormal (No in S604), then the game control unit 200 initially As the conversion process, the stored contents of the RAM 203 are cleared (S606), and the work area of the RAM 203 is set (S607). Then, the game control unit 200 outputs a command for setting (initializing) the sub control means to the effect control unit 300, and sets the sub board (sub control means) (S608). The setting of the sub-board includes clearing the RAM 303, RAM 313, and RAM 323 mounted on each sub-board.

After the return process (see S605) is completed or the sub-board setting (see S608) is completed, the game control unit 200 sets various counters and timers used for the game control (S609). Then, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the interrupt enable (S610), interrupt disable (S611), symbol random number control process (S612), initial value random number update process (S613), and power cutoff flag are ON. (S614) is repeatedly executed as a loop process.
Here, interrupt enable (S610) and interrupt disable (S611) are provided to enable execution of interrupt processing during execution of this loop processing (S610 to S614). In the present embodiment, the main control process in the game control is executed by this interrupt process. The details of the main control process will be described later.
In the symbol random number control process (S612), the game control unit 200 updates the variable pattern random number used in the special symbol lottery.
In the initial value random number update process (S613), the game control unit 200 updates the initial values of various random numbers used in the game control.
In the determination of the power cutoff flag, when the power cutoff flag is OFF (No in S614), the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not cut off, and the game control unit 200 performs main control by interrupt together with loop processing (S610 to S614). Repeat the process. On the other hand, when the power cutoff flag is ON (Yes in S614), the game control unit 200 starts a process for shutting off the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (power cutoff process).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the operation of the power cutoff process by the game control unit 200.
In the power cutoff process, the game control unit 200 first clears the setting of the output port for performing various outputs (S701). Next, the game control unit 200 creates a checksum and stores it in the RAM 203 (S702). Next, the game control unit 200 turns on the backup flag (S703), prohibits access to the RAM 203 (S704), and shifts to an infinite loop.

By performing the power cutoff process shown in FIG. 7, the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off. The state in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is cut off is hereinafter referred to as a power off state. For example, when an operation for shutting off the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is performed, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. Further, for example, when a power failure occurs in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. Further, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in a power-off state due to a connection failure of the connector connecting the power supply source to the pachinko gaming machine 100 and the pachinko gaming machine 100, a momentary interruption due to chattering in the switching power supply, or the like. become.

Further, in the present embodiment, when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the power off state, the basic processing shown in FIG. 6 is performed, so that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is a game before the power is turned off. Is in control. Entering the game control state before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power-off state is regarded as returning from the power-off state. Further, in a broad sense, the pachinko gaming machine 100 operating in the power-off state by receiving the power supply is also included in the recovery from the power-off state. This operation includes, for example, causing various lamps to emit light, moving the movable accessory 115 and the effect button 161, outputting sound from the speaker 156, displaying an image on the image display unit 114, and the like.

Here, there are two types of recovery from the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100: a recovery with RAM clear and a recovery without RAM clear. The RAM clear is to initialize the stored contents of the RAM 203 (erase the information stored in the RAM 203). Initializing the stored contents of the RAM 203 means to change the stored contents of the RAM 203 to the stored contents at the time of shipment of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Hereinafter, the restoration accompanied by clearing the RAM is referred to as an initialization restoration. Further, the restoration without clearing the RAM is referred to as a non-initialization restoration.

In the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from the power off state, processing using various lamps and the like is performed. This process includes a process when an initialization return is performed and a process when a non-initialization return is performed. The process when the initialization return is performed is hereinafter referred to as the initialization return process. Further, the process when the non-initialization return is performed is hereinafter referred to as the non-initialization return process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from the power off state, a process of causing the movable accessory 115 or the like to perform a test operation is performed. This process includes a process when an initialization return is performed and a process when a non-initialization return is performed. The process when the initialization return is performed is hereinafter referred to as the initialization test operation process. Further, the process when the deinitialization return is performed is hereinafter referred to as the deinitialization test operation process.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the initialization return is performed, a process for notifying that the stored contents of the RAM 203 is initialized (RAM clear) is performed. The process of notifying that the stored contents of the RAM 203 are initialized is hereinafter referred to as an initialization notification process.
The processing contents of the initialization / recovery processing, the non-initialization / recovery processing, the initialization test operation processing, the non-initialization test operation processing, and the initialization notification processing will be described in detail later.

[Main control process of game machine]
Next, the main control process of the pachinko gaming machine 100 will be described.
In the main control process, the game control unit 200 controls the game in the pachinko gaming machine 100, instructs the effect control unit 300, which is a sub control means, to control the effect, and gives the payout control unit 330 a prize ball. Instruct to control the payout of.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control process of the game control unit 200.
The main control process consists of a series of processes in game control, and is repeatedly executed at predetermined fixed time (for example, 4 milliseconds). In the present embodiment, the game control unit 200 generates an interrupt at preset fixed time intervals, and when the interrupt is enabled in the loop process shown in FIG. 6 (see S610), the main control is performed as the interrupt process. Execute the process. As shown in FIG. 8, in the main control processing, random number update processing, switch processing, symbol processing, electric accessory processing, prize ball processing, output processing, information program call processing, game ball counting processing, normal base value calculation Processing, performance display data setting processing, test data creation processing, and output control processing are sequentially executed (S801 to S880).

In the random number update process (S801), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number control unit 241 to update the values of various random numbers used in the game control by the game control unit 200. Details of setting the random number and updating the random number value will be described later.

As the switch process (S802), a start port switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the start port switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231 to monitor the states of the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212 in FIG. 3, and the switch is turned on. If this happens, the process for special symbol lottery is executed. Further, as will be described in detail later, when the pre-determination process is performed by the first start port switch 211 and the second start port switch 212, each function (subroutine) of the special symbol determination unit 234 and the variation pattern selection unit 235 is called. Execute the process for pre-judgment.
In the gate switch process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the random number acquisition unit 231 to monitor the state of the gate switch 214 in FIG. 3, and when the switch is turned on, for a normal symbol lottery. Execute the process.
The detailed contents of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (S803), a special symbol processing and a normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls each function (subroutine) of the special symbol variation control unit 233, the special symbol determination unit 234, and the variation pattern selection unit 235, and executes the special symbol variation and the processing associated with the symbol variation. To do.
In the normal symbol processing, the game control unit 200 calls the functions (subroutines) of the normal symbol determination unit 232 and the normal symbol variation control unit 236, and executes the normal symbol variation and the processing associated with the symbol variation.
The detailed contents of these symbol processing will be described later.

As the electric accessory processing (S804), a large winning opening processing and an electric tulip processing are performed.
In the large winning opening process, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the large winning opening operation control unit 237 and controls the opening operation of the large winning opening 125, which is a special electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip processing, the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the electric tulip motion control unit 238 and controls the opening operation of the electric tulip 123, which is an ordinary electric accessory, based on a predetermined condition.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processing will be described later.

In the prize ball processing (S805), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the prize ball processing unit 239, and sets a command for managing the number of prizes and controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prize.

In the output process (S806), the game control unit 200 calls the function (subroutine) of the output control unit 240, outputs a command for effect control to the effect control unit 300, and outputs a command for payout control to the payout control unit 330. Output. The effect control command is generated in each process from S802 to S804, and is stored (set) in the control command storage area provided in the RAM 203. The payout control command is generated in the process of S805 and is stored (set) in the storage area of the control command provided in the RAM 203. A storage area is set in the RAM 203 for each type of control command.

The output control unit 240 examines the storage area of each control command of the RAM 203 in order, and if the control command is stored in each storage area (that is, the control command is generated by the processing of S802 to S805). (B), the control command is read and output to the output destination (effect control unit 300 or payout control unit 330).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the output process is performed at the end of a series of main control processes. That is, the commands generated in each of the processes S802 to S805 by each of the above functions as the first processing means are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203 in each of the processes. Then, after these processes, the output control unit 240 as the second processing means collectively outputs the commands generated in each process accumulated in the storage area of the RAM 203. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control process is executed for one cycle, the command generated in the execution of the one cycle is output after the last command generation in the execution of the one cycle is performed.

In the information program call time processing (S810), the game control unit 200 performs a process for calling the target information program.

In the game ball counting process (information program (S820)), the game control unit 200 determines the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of the game balls to various winning openings in the normal game state (low probability time saving non-game state). The number of normal payouts, the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 in the normal game state, the number of normal outs, and the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 227 regardless of the game state. Performs processing for counting game performance information such as the total number of outs.
Note that the total number of outs, the number of regular outs, and the number of normal outs are game performance information that is not affected even if the set value is changed (irrelevant to the set value). By counting the numbers, it is possible to calculate performance information (normal base value described later) excluding the influence of the set value, which is useful for grasping the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In the normal base value calculation process (information program (S830)), the game control unit 200 uses the normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal middle out number) × 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs. Is calculated, and the first area of the base storage area set in the information RAM area, which is the storage area of the RAM 203 and is used as the work (work area) when the information program is executed, is rounded to the first decimal place. Performs the process of saving the base value.
The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is once with the first area in which the normal base value in the current game section is stored. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous game section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the game section two times before, and a normal base value in the game section three times before are stored. A fourth area is provided for this purpose, and the normal base values for the four game sections including the present are saved in each area.

In the performance display data setting process (information program (S850)), the game control unit 200 has a normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated by the normal base value calculation process and saved in the base storage area. ) Is switched every 5 seconds to set the performance display data to be displayed on the information display 230. The details of the performance display data setting process will be described later.

In the test data creation process (information program (S870)), the game control unit 200 performs a process of creating test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the pachinko gaming machine 100.

In the output control process (information program (S880)), the game control unit 200 performs a display output process for outputting signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in the performance display data setting process to various indicators, and a test. Performs the process of outputting signals such as test data created in the data creation process.

[Modification example of basic operation of game machine]
In the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, interrupts are permitted in the loop processing portion of the basic processing, and the main control processing including a series of processing is executed as the interrupt processing. However, the main control process may be configured to be repeatedly executed at regular intervals, and the specific realization means (execution procedure) is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 6 to 8. For example, the main control process may be incorporated into a series of operations of the basic process, the elapsed time may be measured at a predetermined timing, and the process may be returned to the main control process at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds). Further, while incorporating the main control process into a series of operations of the basic process, interrupts are generated at regular intervals in the same manner as the operations described with reference to FIGS. 6 to 8, and if an interrupt occurs. It may be configured to return to the main control process incorporated during the basic process.

Further, when outputting the command generated in the basic processing, as a general rule, each time the command is generated, it is stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203, and the function of the output control unit 240 which is the second processing means is called. Output. The basic process is different from the main control process related to the progress of the game, and is a special process such as an initial operation performed only when the power is turned on. In addition, since the processing procedure of the basic processing may change due to branching based on conditions such as the state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the power is turned on, the generated command is promptly output so that there is no omission in the output processing. It is a process. In addition, in response to a specific processing request, such as when commands are continuously generated by a plurality of related processes, a processing procedure is adopted in which a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area of the RAM 203 and output collectively. You may.

[Random number update processing by the game control unit]
The random number value as the determination information used for various lottery in the game control such as the special symbol lottery is counted by the counter, and the random number update process (S801) of the main control process shown in FIG. 8 starts from a predetermined initial value. One is added each time it is done. Then, the value at the time when each lottery is performed is acquired by the start port switch process (FIG. 9) and the gate switch process (FIG. 10), and is used in the special symbol process (FIG. 11) and the normal symbol process (FIG. 16). To. This random number value counter is an infinite loop counter, and after the counted random number value reaches the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 299 for the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 20A described later). , Returns to the initial value again. Further, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, the winning value may be estimated based on the update interval and the information of the initial value. Therefore, after returning from the main control process to the basic process shown in FIG. 6, the initial value of each random number is randomly changed in the initial value random number update process of S613.

[Starting port switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch process among the switch processes shown in S802 of FIG.
In this start port switch process, a process for winning a prize at the first start port 121 and a process for winning a prize at the second start port 122 are sequentially performed. With reference to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 121 and the first start port switch 211 has been turned on (S901). When the first start port switch 211 is turned on, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the number of unchanged hold numbers U1 in the winning of the first start port 121 is less than the upper limit value (S902). .. In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to 4. If the number of holds U1 has reached the upper limit (No in S902), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so that the processing for winning at the first starting port 121 ends.

On the other hand, when the hold number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S902), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the determination by the winning this time and stores it in the RAM 203 (S903). .. Here, since the first starting port 121 is won, a random number value for a special symbol lottery is acquired. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined by the random value in the subsequent special symbol processing. The random number values referred to here are the jackpot random value that determines the jackpot, small hit or miss, and the type of symbol (time saving state or time saving no state after the end of the big hit game, high probability state and low probability state, long hit, short). Set the symbol random value (big hit symbol random value) that determines the hit), the fluctuation pattern random value for specifying the fluctuation pattern in the symbol fluctuation, and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) that can execute the reach effect described later when the symbol is out of order. Includes reach random values, etc. that determine whether or not.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S904). The pre-determination process is a process of determining a random number acquired as a result of winning a prize at the starting port (pre-determination) before the special symbol process in the symbol process (S803).

Then, the effect control unit 300 is based on the determination result (pre-determination result) of the random number determined by the pre-determination process, before the determination result by the special symbol process in the symbol process (S803) is notified. A notice effect suggesting the determination result can be performed. This advance notice effect is performed, for example, by using a hold display effect (described later) displayed on the image display unit 114 in response to the generation of a random number acquired as a result of winning a prize at the start port.

Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U1 (S905).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S904 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S906).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U1 due to S905 in the RAM 203 (S907), and ends the process for winning the prize at the first start port 121. ..

Next, processing for winning a prize at the second starting port 122 is performed. With reference to FIG. 9, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second start port 122 and the second start port switch 212 has been turned on (S908). When the second start port switch 212 is turned on, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the number of unchanged hold numbers U2 in the winning of the second start port 122 is less than the upper limit value (S909). ). In the example shown in FIG. 9, the upper limit is set to 4. When the number of holds U2 has reached the upper limit (No in S909), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so that the processing for winning at the second starting port 122 ends.

On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S909), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery by this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S910). .. Here, since the second starting port 122 is won, the random number values for the special symbol lottery (big hit random value, jackpot symbol random value, reach random value, variable pattern random value, etc.) are acquired in the same manner as in S903 above. To. The random number value acquired at this time is a value updated by the random number update process of S801. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random value.

Next, the game control unit 200 performs a pre-determination process (S911). The content of this pre-determination process is the same as that of S904 described above.
Then, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the reserved number U2 (S912).
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information by the pre-determination process of S911 in the RAM 203 in order to notify the effect control unit 300 of the pre-determination result (S913).
Further, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number U2 due to S912 in the RAM 203 (S914), and ends the process for winning the prize at the second start port 122. ..

Although not shown, in the low-probability time-saving game state, the pre-determination process (S911) accompanying the winning of the second starting port 122 is controlled to be non-executed (prohibited), and in the high-probability time-saving game state. May perform control not to execute the pre-determination process (S904) accompanying the winning of the first starting port 121.

[Gate switch processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch processing when the game ball passes through the gate 124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the gate switch 214 is turned on (S1001). When the gate switch 214 is turned ON, the game control unit 200 then determines whether or not the number of unchanged hold numbers G is less than the upper limit value (S1002). In the example shown in FIG. 10, the upper limit is set to four. If the number of holds G has reached the upper limit (No in S1002), the winning of the unvariable portion cannot be held any more, so the gate switch process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the number of holds G is less than the upper limit value (Yes in S1002), the random number acquisition unit 231 of the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value for the lottery by this winning and stores it in the RAM 203 (S1003). .. Here, since the prize is won at the gate 124, a random number value (a winning random number value, etc.) for a normal symbol lottery is acquired.

Next, the game control unit 200 adds 1 to the value of the hold number G (S1004).
After the value of the hold number G is added in S1004, the game control unit 200 sets the hold number G increase command in the RAM 203 to notify the effect control unit 300 of the increase in the hold number G by S1004 (S1005). The process for winning a prize at the gate 124 is terminated.

[Special symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing among the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit 233 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the jackpot game flag is ON in the flag setting (hereinafter, flag setting) set in the RAM 203 (hereinafter, flag setting). S1101). Here, the jackpot game flag is a flag set to identify whether or not the jackpot game performed according to the result of the special symbol lottery is being executed.

When the jackpot game flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is already executing the jackpot game, so that the special symbol processing is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in S1101). It should be noted that the execution of the jackpot game can be regarded as the execution of the jackpot game, which is a game related to the determination and fluctuation of the previous special symbol lottery. When the jackpot game flag is OFF (No in S1101), the special symbol variation control unit 233 then determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the special symbol variation (S1102). When the special symbol is not changing (No in S1102), the special symbol change control unit 233 then performs processing related to the pending numbers U1 and U2 (see FIG. 9) of the unchanged portion of the special symbol (S1103 to S1106). In the present embodiment, since the number of holds U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 and the number of holdings U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 are distinguished, this process is also a switch provided at the corresponding starting port. Do it individually for each.

Specifically, the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 first determines whether the number of reservations U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is 1 or more (S1103). When the hold number U2 is 1 or more (Yes in S1103), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number U2 (S1104). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U2 = 0 (No in S1103), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 then determines whether the number of reservations U1 related to the winning of the first starting port 121 is 1 or more (S1105). When the hold number U1 is 1 or more (Yes in S1105), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number U1 (S1106). On the other hand, when the number of reservations U1 = 0 (No in S1105), it means that there is no prize for starting the lottery of the special symbol. Therefore, the special symbol change is not started and the customer waiting setting process of another routine is performed. Is executed to end the process (S1116).
In the present embodiment, the process related to the number of reservations U2 related to the winning of the second starting port 122 is prioritized. That is, when the number of holds U2 is 1 or more, the process of the number of holds U2 is performed, and when the number of holds U2 = 0, the process of the number of holds U1 is performed (see S803 to S806). On the other hand, regardless of which of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122 is won, the number of holds U1 and U2 can be subtracted in the order of winning.

After subtracting the hold number U1 or the hold number U2 in S1104 or S1106, the special symbol variation control unit 233 turns off the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1107). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (S1116, see FIG. 15 described later).

Next, the special symbol variation control unit 233 executes a jackpot determination process and a variation pattern selection process by another routine (S1108, S1109). Although details will be described later, setting information for fluctuation of the special symbol (big hit symbol, game) that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The state, fluctuation pattern, etc.) are determined. It should be noted that these pieces of information are included in the fluctuation start command sent to the effect control unit 300.

After that, the special symbol variation control unit 233 is displayed by the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 shown in FIG. 2 based on the setting contents determined by the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process. The change of the special symbol is started (S1110). Then, a fluctuation start command including setting information (big hit symbol, game state, fluctuation pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM 203 (S1111). The fluctuation start command set in S1111 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

When it is determined in S1102 that the special symbol is changing (Yes in S1102), or after the change start command is set in S1111, the special symbol change control unit 233 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1112). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in S1110 has reached the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern selection process of S1109. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1112), the special symbol variation is continued, so that the special symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has elapsed (Yes in S1112), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 first determines the fluctuation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 in the jackpot determination process of S1108. It stops at the symbol determined in (S1113). A variable stop command for stopping the decorative symbol described later is set in the RAM 203 (S1114). Then, the stopped processing of another routine is executed (S1115). The details of the stopped processing will be described later. The fluctuation stop command set in S1114 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

[Big hit judgment processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (S1108 in FIG. 11).
In this jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit 234 of the game control unit 200 first determines the jackpot random number value in the special symbol lottery this time (S1201), and determines whether or not it is a jackpot or a small hit (S1202). , S1205). Whether or not a jackpot or a small hit is determined is whether or not the value of the jackpot random number acquired in S903 or S910 in FIG. 9 matches the value set as the jackpot winning value or the value set as the small hit winning value. It is determined by determining whether or not (see FIG. 20 (a)).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a big hit (Yes in S1202), the special symbol determination unit 234 then determines the jackpot symbol random number value (S1203). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of symbol (big hit in the high-probability time-saving game state, big hit in the low-probability time-saving non-game state, etc.) is determined. Which jackpot will be won is determined by which of the values preset for each symbol type matches the value of the jackpot symbol random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 (FIG. 20 (Fig. 20). b) See).

After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit 234 sets the jackpot symbol determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1204).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is a small hit (No in S1202, Yes in S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses a symbol indicating that it is a small hit (hereinafter, small hit symbol) as setting information. It is set in the RAM 203 (S1206).

When the result of the random number determination in S1201 is neither a big hit nor a small hit (No in S1202 and S1205), then the special symbol determination unit 234 uses the symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter, the missed symbol) as setting information in the RAM 203. (S1207).

[Variation pattern selection process by the game control unit]
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1109 in FIG. 11).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit 235 of the game control unit 200 first refers to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or a time saving state, and a high probability state or a low probability state). (S1301). Then, using the determination result of S1202 of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), it is determined whether or not a jackpot has been achieved in this special symbol lottery (S1302). Then, in the case of a big hit (Yes in S1302), the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 reads the fluctuation pattern table for the big hit from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1303).

On the other hand, if there is no big hit (No in S1302), then the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 determines a random number value for determining whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect for the player to expect a big hit. (S1304). Whether or not the reach effect is an executable variation pattern is determined by determining whether or not the value of the reach random number acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 matches a preset value (FIG. 9). 20 (c)).
As a result of the determination using the random value, when the reach effect is set to the executable variation pattern (variation time) (Yes in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROM 202 and puts it in the RAM 203. Set (S1306). Further, when the reach effect is not set to an executable variation pattern (fluctuation time) (No in S1305), the variation pattern selection unit 235 reads the variation pattern table for removal from the ROM 202 and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1307).
Here, the fluctuation pattern table is a plurality of fluctuation patterns (variation time 3 seconds, 7 seconds, 13 seconds, 15 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) prepared in advance and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number. It is a table associated with.

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 determines the fluctuation pattern random value using the fluctuation pattern random value acquired in S903 or S910 of FIG. 9 and the fluctuation pattern table set in S1303, S1306, and S1307 (S1308). ). That is, the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 refers to the fluctuation pattern table set in the RAM 203, and selects a fluctuation pattern according to the random number value of the fluctuation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (whether it is a time saving state or a time saving state, and a high probability state or a low probability state), and the result of a special symbol lottery (whether or not a big hit is made). , If there is no big hit, whether or not to perform reach effect), etc., the reference variation pattern table is different, so the determined variation pattern is different.

After that, the fluctuation pattern selection unit 235 sets the fluctuation pattern selected in S1308 in the RAM 203 as setting information (S1309). The fluctuation pattern setting information set in S1309 is included in the fluctuation start command set in S1111 of FIG. 11, and is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. Details of the fluctuation pattern selected in this embodiment and its setting will be described later.

[Processing during stop by the game control unit]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the stopped processing (S1115 of FIG. 11).
In this stopped processing, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the flag indicating the time saving state (hereinafter, the time saving flag) is turned on in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1401). When the time saving flag is ON (Yes in S1401), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) J in the time saving state (S1402), and whether or not the lottery number J becomes 0. (S1403). Then, if the number of lottery times J = 0 (Yes in S1403), the time saving flag is turned off (S1404). The operation of turning on the time saving flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number J are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the time saving flag is OFF (No in S1401), after turning off the time saving flag in S1404, or when the value of the lottery number J after subtraction in S1402 is not 0 (No in S1403), then the game control The unit 200 checks whether or not the flag indicating the high probability state (hereinafter, the high probability flag) is turned ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1405). If both the high-probability flag and the previous time-saving flag are ON, the game is in the high-probability time-saving game state, and if the high-probability flag is ON and the time-saving flag is OFF, the game is in the high-probability time-saving non-game state. is there.

When the high probability flag is ON (Yes in S1405), the game control unit 200 subtracts 1 from the value of the lottery number (variation number) X in the high probability state (S1406), and has the lottery number X become 0? Check whether or not (S1407). Then, if the number of lottery times X = 0 (Yes in S1407), the high accuracy flag is turned off (S1408). The operation of turning on the high accuracy flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery number X are performed in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

When the high accuracy flag is OFF (No in S1405), after the high accuracy flag is turned OFF in S1408, or when the value of the lottery count X after subtraction in S1406 is not 0 (No in S1407), then The game control unit 200 determines whether or not a big hit has been made in this special symbol lottery (S1409). Then, in the case of a big hit (Yes in S1409), the game control unit 200 then determines the type of the symbol (S1410). Here, as an example of determining the type of symbol, it is determined whether or not it is a long hit.

Here, the determination of whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot can be determined based on the determination result of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12). For example, if any of the symbols shown in the chart of FIG. 20B, which will be described later, is set, it is Yes in S1409. If a missed symbol or a small hit symbol is set in the RAM 203 by the jackpot determination process, the result is No in S1409.

For example, when the type of the symbol such as the low-probability symbol A is a long hit (Yes in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the long hit game flag (S1411). As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the big hit game state (long hit game state) in which the type of symbol is a long hit. It should be noted that here, in the long hit, there is no distinction between a high probability state and a low probability state. Whether the state becomes a high probability state or a low probability state is specified by turning on the corresponding flag in the game state setting process (FIG. 18) in the large winning opening process (FIG. 17) described later.

For example, when the type of the symbol such as the high-probability symbol E is not a long hit (No in S1410), the game control unit 200 turns on the short hit game flag (S1412). As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the big hit game state (short hit game state) in which the type of symbol is a short hit. As in the case of long hits, short hits do not distinguish between high-probability states and low-probability states.

After turning on the jackpot game flag in S1411 or S1412, the game control unit 200 initializes the values of the lottery numbers J and X (S1413). Further, the game control unit 200 turns off the time saving flag when the time saving flag is ON in S1401 and the lottery number J is not 0 in S1403 (S1414). Similarly, when the high accuracy flag is ON in S1405 and the lottery number X is not 0 in S1407, the high accuracy flag is turned OFF (S1414).

After initializing the values of the lottery times J and X in S1413, the game control unit 200 starts the opening operation (S1417). Here, the content of the opening operation differs depending on which of S1411 and S1412 the winning game flag is turned ON. In other words, the opening operation is set according to the determination result of the special symbol lottery.
After that, the game control unit 200 sets the opening command for performing the effect in the opening operation according to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAM 203 (S1418), and ends the stopped processing. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery this time is not a big hit (No in S1409), then the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a small hit (S1415). ). If it is not a small hit (No in S1415), the stopped processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is a small hit (Yes in S1415), the game control unit 200 starts the small hit game (S1416). As a result, the game state setting of the RAM 203 becomes the small hit game state. In the small hit game, as described above, the large winning opening 125 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and the game ends after a predetermined time has elapsed.

[Customer waiting setting processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (S1116 in FIG. 11).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1501). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state.

When the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state, so the process ends as it is (Yes in S1501). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF (No in S1501), the game control unit 200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM 203 (S1502), and turns on the customer waiting flag (S1503). The customer waiting command set in S1502 is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 by the output process shown in S806 of FIG. Here, the customer waiting flag is not executing the jackpot game (No in S1101) and not changing the special symbol (No in S1102) as described in the customer waiting setting process (S1116) in FIG. Further, it is a flag to be set when there is no hold (No in S1103 and S1105).

[Normal symbol processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing among the symbol processing shown in S803 of FIG.
In this normal symbol processing, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1601). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when a normal symbol lottery is won. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip 123 is opened according to the electric tulip process (FIG. 19) described later, and it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 122 (auxiliary game state).

When the auxiliary game flag is ON, the auxiliary game state is already in effect and the normal symbol is stopped. Therefore, the normal symbol processing is terminated without starting the normal symbol change (Yes in S1601). On the other hand, when the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in S1601), the normal symbol variation control unit 236 then determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the normal symbol variation (S1602). When the normal symbol is not changing (No in S1602), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 then determines whether the number of pending numbers G (see FIG. 10) of the unchanged portion of the normal symbol is 1 or more (S1603). When the number of holds G = 0 (No in S1603), it means that there is no prize for starting the lottery of the normal symbol, so the process ends without starting the normal symbol change.

On the other hand, when the hold number G is 1 or more (Yes in S1603), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 subtracts 1 from the value of the hold number G (S1604). Then, the ordinary symbol determination unit 232 determines the winning random number in the ordinary symbol lottery this time, and determines whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won (S1605). Whether or not the winning value is determined is determined by determining whether or not the value of the winning random number acquired in S1003 of FIG. 10 matches the value set as the winning value in the table or the like shown in FIG. 20 (d) described later. It is determined.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (S1606). That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the symbol representing the winning (hereinafter, the winning symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as the setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a missed symbol) is set in the RAM 203 as setting information.

Next, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S1607). This fluctuation time is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14, and S1804 and S1807 in FIG. 18 described later. That is, when the time saving flag is ON at the time of setting by S1607, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and when the time saving flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). Will be done. After this setting, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 starts the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 shown in FIGS. 2 (a) and 3 based on the setting contents of S1607 (S1608). It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol can also be determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, the random number acquisition unit 231 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number value of the normal symbol, and in S1607, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 obtains the fluctuation pattern random number value of the normal symbol. By determining, the fluctuation time is set.

After starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol in S1608, or when it is determined in S1602 that the normal symbol is changing (Yes in S1602), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1609). ). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time since the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol in S1608 has reached the fluctuation time set in S1607. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (No in S1609), the normal symbol fluctuation is continued, so that the normal symbol processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has elapsed (Yes in S1609), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit 236 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 223 (S1610). Then, the normal symbol variation control unit 236 determines whether or not the determination result of S1605 is a winning (S1611). If it is won (Yes in S1611), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (S1612). On the other hand, if the lottery is missed (No in S1611), the normal symbol processing is completed without turning on the auxiliary game flag.

[Large winning opening processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the contents of the large winning opening processing among the electric accessory processing shown in S804 of FIG.
In this big prize opening process, the big winning opening operation control unit 237 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the big hit game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1701). When the jackpot game flag is OFF, there is no winning in the jackpot 125, so the jackpot processing ends (No in S1701). On the other hand, when the jackpot game flag is ON (Yes in S1701), the jackpot motion control unit 237 then opens the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the motion control at the time of the jackpot started in the stopped processing (FIG. 14). It is determined whether or not the operation is in progress (S1702).

When the pachinko gaming machine 100 is opening (Yes in S1702), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 then determines whether or not the preset opening operation should be performed (opening time). (S1703). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the large winning opening 125 is continued, so the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1703). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1703), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 sets the operation of the large winning opening 125 (S1704) and initializes the winning number C (C = 0). Then (S1705), the value of the number of rounds R of the operation of the large winning opening 125 is added by 1 from the current value (S1706), and the large winning opening 125 is started (opened) (S1707).

In the operation setting of S1704, the operation pattern of the large winning opening 125 and the number of rounds (the number of operation rounds) to be operated by the operation pattern are set. As an example of the case where the big winning opening 125 operates, there are a case where it is a big hit of a long hit or a short hit and a case where it is a small hit in a special symbol lottery. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are set variously according to the types of these hits. In the jackpot game, it is stipulated that the jackpot 125 is operated a plurality of times (multiple rounds) in succession. As an example, in the case of a long hit, for example, 15 rounds (15R) are operated, and in one round, 29.5 seconds of opening is performed once. In the case of a short hit, for example, two rounds (2R) are operated, and in one round, 0.9 seconds are opened once. To further explain, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a small hit, for example, it is opened for 0.9 seconds, closed for 1.0 second, and then opened for 0.9 seconds. Here, comparing the operation with a short hit and the operation with a small hit in the above example, the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed twice. That is, the operation of the large winning opening 125 seen by the player is the same in the case of the short hit and the case of the small hit, and the short hit and the small hit are distinguished only from the operation of the large winning opening 125 on the game board 110. You can't.

In the case of a small hit, the law stipulates that the cumulative opening time of the large winning opening 125 must be set within 1.8 seconds. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (long hit or short hit), the big winning opening 125 must be opened a plurality of times in succession by the number of rounds R of the big hit game. Therefore, when it is difficult to visually distinguish between the operation with a small hit and the operation with a short hit as described above, in the case of a small hit, the cumulative opening time in one operation is within 1.8 seconds. An operation mode in which the large winning opening 125 is opened twice or more is set, and in the short hit, the number of rounds equal to the number of times the small hit is opened is set.

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in S1704 has elapsed (S1708). If the open state of the large winning opening 125 has not passed the opening time (No in S1708), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 has a specified number C of winnings in the large winning opening 125 (for example, 9). (S1709). If the opening time has not passed and the winning number C is less than the specified number, the operating state (opening state) of the large winning opening 125 is continued, so that the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1709). ). On the other hand, when the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1708) or when the number of winnings C reaches the specified number (Yes in S1709), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 ends the operation of the large winning opening 125 (closing). (S1710).

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the number of rounds R of operation of the large winning opening 125 has reached the maximum value set in S1704 (S1711). Then, if the maximum value is not reached, the remaining operations are performed, and the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1711).

When the number of rounds R of the operation of the large winning opening 125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in S1711), the large winning opening operation control unit 237 then starts the ending operation (S1712). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the jackpot game flag among the ending operations set in each of the long-hit game and the short-hit game.
After that, the big prize opening operation control unit 237 sets the ending command in the RAM 203 to perform the effect in the ending operation according to the jackpot game flag in the effect control unit 300 (S1713). This ending command is transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process shown in S806 of FIG.

Next, the large winning opening operation control unit 237 resets the number of rounds R of the operation of the large winning opening 125 to 0 (S1714), and then performs the ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is preset. It is determined whether or not the desired time (ending time) has passed (S1717). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, so the large winning opening process is terminated (No in S1717). On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717), then the big prize opening operation control unit 237 turns off the big hit game flag after the game state setting process by the game control unit 200 (S1718). The large winning opening process is completed (S1719). The content of the game state setting process will be described later.

When it is determined in S1702 that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the opening (No in S1702), then the grand prize opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not it is in the ending (S1715). Then, if the ending is in progress (Yes in S1715), the operations after S1717 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the ending (No in S1715), then the large winning opening operation control unit 237 determines whether or not the large winning opening 125 is operating (opening) (S1716). Then, if it is not in operation (No in S1716), the operation after S1705 is executed, and if it is in operation (Yes in S1716), the operation after S1708 is executed.
It should be noted that the effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish between the short hit and the small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the contents of the game state setting process (S1718) by the game control unit 200, which is executed when the ending time has elapsed (Yes in S1717).
When the game state setting process is performed, the jackpot game flag is ON in S1701 of FIG. 17 as a premise. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, the game control unit 200 first determines the type of the symbol (S1801, S1802, S1803, S1806). These determinations can be made based on, for example, the type of symbol set in the RAM 203 as setting information in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12). Since these determinations are substantially the same as those of S1202, S1203, and S1205 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the determination results of S1202, S1203, and S1205 may be used.

If it is a small hit (Yes in S1801), the game state is not changed, so the game state setting process is terminated.
When the type of the symbol is a big hit in the low-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801, Yes in S1802, Yes in S1803), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1804). As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the low-probability time-saving game state. Further, the game control unit 200 sets an initial value of the lottery number J (S1805), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 times in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in which the determination result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed 100 times in succession in the low-probability time-saving game state, the low-probability time-saving game state ends and the low-probability time-saving non-game state is established.

On the other hand, when the type of symbol is a big hit in a low-probability time-saving non-game state (No in S1801, Yes in 1802, No in S1803), the game control unit 200 performs processing without turning on both the time-saving flag and the high-accuracy flag. finish. Therefore, the setting of the game state of the RAM 203 for the game after the jackpot is a low-probability time-saving non-game state.

When the type of the symbol is a big hit in the high-probability time-saving game state (No in S1801 and S1802, Yes in S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on the time-saving flag (S1807) and sets the initial value of the lottery number J. (S1808). The initial value of the lottery number J in this case is 10,000 times in the illustrated example. Further, the game control unit 200 turns on the high accuracy flag (S1809) and sets the initial value of the lottery number X (S1810). The initial value of the lottery number X is 10,000 times in the illustrated example. As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the high-probability time-saving game state. Then, if the lottery in which the determination result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is continuously performed 10,000 times in this high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability time-saving game state ends and the low-probability time-saving non-game state is established.

On the other hand, when the type of the symbol is a big hit in a high-probability time-saving non-game state (No in S1801, S1802, S1806), the game control unit 200 turns on only the high probability flag (S1809), and the initial value of the number of lottery X (10000 times) is set (S1810). As a result, the game state of the RAM 203 is set to the high-probability time-saving non-game state. Then, in this high-probability time-saving no-game state, if the lottery in which the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is performed 10,000 times in succession, the high-probability time-saving no-game state ends, and the low-probability time-saving no-game state Become.

[Electric tulip processing by the game control unit]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip processing among the electric accessory processing shown in S804 of FIG.
In the electric tulip processing, the electric tulip motion control unit 238 of the game control unit 200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAM 203 (S1901). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, the electric tulip 123 is not opened, so the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1901). On the other hand, when the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in S1901), the electric tulip motion control unit 238 then determines whether or not the electric tulip 123 is operating (S1902).

When the electric tulip 123 is not operating (No in S1902), the electric tulip operation control unit 238 sets the operation pattern of the electric tulip 123 (S1903) and operates the electric tulip 123 in the set operation pattern (S1904). .. Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processes of S1404 and S1414 in FIG. 14, S1804 and S1807 in FIG. For example, when the time saving flag is OFF at the time of setting by S1903, an operation pattern of opening once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and when the time saving flag is ON, opening of 1.80 seconds. An operation pattern that opens three times in time is set. In this way, normally, when the time saving flag is ON (when the time saving state is in the state), the electric tulip 123 is opened a plurality of times for a long time, and it becomes easy to win a prize in the second starting port 122 (electric chew support). Is done. It should be noted that a plurality of operation patterns (types of auxiliary games) of the electric tulip 123 when the time saving flag is ON or OFF are prepared, and the operation is performed according to the type of hit determined by the normal symbol processing (see FIG. 16). It may be configured to set a pattern.

When it is determined in S1902 that the electric tulip 123 is operating (Yes in S1902), or after the electric tulip 123 is operated in S1904, the electric tulip motion control unit 238 elapses the opening time in the set operation pattern. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1905). If the opening time has not elapsed, the operating state (opening state) of the electric tulip 123 is continued, so that the electric tulip processing is terminated (No in S1905). On the other hand, when the opening time has elapsed (Yes in S1905), the electric tulip motion control unit 238 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip processing (S1906).

[Random number judgment method]
Here, a random number determination method performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 12), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 13), the ordinary symbol process (FIG. 16), and the like will be described in detail.
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a random number (determination table) used in the special symbol lottery and the ordinary symbol lottery in the present embodiment.
FIG. 20 (a) shows a configuration example of a jackpot random number used in a special symbol lottery, FIG. 20 (b) shows a configuration example of a jackpot symbol random number used in a special symbol lottery, and FIG. 20 (c) shows a special symbol lottery. A configuration example of the reach random number used and a configuration example of the winning random number used in the ordinary symbol lottery are shown in FIG. 20 (d), respectively.

With reference to FIG. 20A, as the determination value of the jackpot random number, the jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 at the time of jackpot determination is in the low probability state and the jackpot when the gaming state at the time of jackpot determination is in the high probability state. Two types and a small hit are set. The range of random numbers (big hit random numbers) is 300, from 0 to 299. In the case of a special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) in a low probability state, only one winning value is set, and the winning probability is 1/300. Further, in the case of a special symbol lottery in a high probability state, 10 winning values are set, and the winning probability is 10/300 (= 1/30). That is, in the illustrated example, when the starting ports 121 and 122 are won in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery is performed, the winning probability is 10 times higher than in the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in the low probability state. Further, the winning value of the small hit is set to three regardless of whether it is in the low probability state or the high probability state, and the winning probability is 3/300 (= 1/100).
Here, to explain by taking a special symbol lottery in a low probability state as an example, the jackpot random number values (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 are shown in FIG. 20. It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value "5" of the jackpot lottery in the low probability state in (a). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery in the high probability state and the special symbol lottery for small hits.

With reference to FIG. 20B, the jackpot symbols include low-probability symbol A, low-probability symbol B, high-probability symbol A, high-probability symbol B, high-probability symbol C, high-probability symbol D, high-probability symbol E, and latent. Eight types of probabilistic patterns are available. Here, the low-probability symbol A and the low-probability symbol B are symbols indicating that they are jackpots in the low-probability state, and among them, the low-probability symbol A is a jackpot in a long hit (8 rounds) and a low-probability short-time gaming state. Indicates that there is. The low-probability symbol B indicates that it is a long hit (4 rounds) and a big hit in a low-probability short-time gaming state. The high-probability symbol A and the high-probability symbol B indicate that they are long hits (15 rounds) and big hits in a high-probability short-time gaming state. The high-probability symbol C and the high-probability symbol D indicate that they are long hits (8 rounds) and big hits in a high-probability short-time gaming state. The high-probability symbol E indicates a short hit (2 rounds) and a high-probability short-time non-game state jackpot. The latent probability symbol is a symbol indicating that it is a short hit (2 rounds) and a big hit in a high-probability short-time non-game state. Therefore, the high-probability symbol E and the latent probability symbol have the same game state after the jackpot game, but the latent probability symbol is a condition for performing a latent effect that does not clearly notify the player that the high-probability symbol is in the high-probability state. Therefore, it is provided separately from the high-probability symbol E. The range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249. Further, in the jackpot symbol random number, winning values are set for each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122, which trigger the special symbol lottery.

In the low-probability symbol A, 35 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol A is 35/250 (= 7/50).
In the low-probability symbol B, 15 values are assigned as winning values to both the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the low probability symbol B is 15/250 (= 3/50).

In the high-probability symbol A, 20 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the high probability symbol A is 20/250 (= 2/25).
On the other hand, 150 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning the high probability symbol A is 150/250 (= 15/25).

In the high-probability symbol B, five values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 5/250 (= 1/50).
On the other hand, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 25/250 (= 1/10).

In the high-probability symbol C, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol C is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning in the high probability symbol B is 10/250 (= 1/25).

In the high-probability symbol D, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the high probability symbol D is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, 10 values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning the high probability symbol D is 10/250 (= 1/25).

In the high-probability symbol E, 25 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the high probability symbol E is 25/250 (= 1/10).
On the other hand, five values are assigned as winning values when the second starting port 122 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the second starting port 122, the probability of winning the high probability symbol E is 5/250 (= 1/50).

In the latent probability symbol, 100 values are assigned as winning values when the first starting port 121 is won. Therefore, if a big hit is won in the special symbol lottery started by winning the first starting port 121, the probability of winning the latent symbol is 100/250 (= 2/5).
On the other hand, the winning value in the latent probability symbol is not assigned to the second starting port 122, and if the second starting port 122 is won, the winning value in the latent probability symbol will not be won.

Here, to explain using the low-probability symbol A as an example, the jackpot symbol random value (see S903 and S910) acquired when the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is won is shown in FIG. ), It is determined whether or not the value matches the winning value of the low-probability symbol A, "0 to 34". Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to special symbol lottery such as low-probability symbol B.

As described above, by making the winning probability of the symbol type different between the case where the first starting port 121 is won and the case where the second starting opening 122 is won, various playability can be provided. In addition, the arrangement of the first start port 121 and the second start port 122 on the game board 110 is devised so that it becomes easier to aim at either the first start port 121 or the second start port 122 in a specific state (mode). It is also possible to encourage the player to participate in a more active game by configuring the above.

Next, the determination of the reach random number will be described. The distribution of reach random numbers is set according to the number of holds, as will be described later. Here, as an example, a reach random number when the number of pending numbers is 0 will be described.
With reference to FIG. 20 (c), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and the reach effect is a feasible fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for example, 13.5 seconds or more). Twenty-two random number values are assigned to (with reach), and 228 random number values are assigned to the determination result (without reach) in which the reach effect is not an executable variation pattern (for example, less than 13.5 seconds). That is, in the illustrated example, if a big hit is not made in the special symbol lottery, the reach effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (= 11/125). Here, the reach effect is an effect performed on the image display unit 114 when the special symbol fluctuates. Hereinafter, the effect at the time of special symbol change in which the reach effect is not a feasible variation pattern is referred to as a non-reach effect, and the effect at the time of a special symbol change in which the reach effect is a feasible variation pattern is referred to as a reach effect. Called.

Here, demonstrating the presence of reach as an example, the reach random value (see S903 and S910) acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122 is the reach in FIG. 20 (c). It is determined whether or not it matches the winning value of "0 to 21". Although detailed explanation is omitted, the same applies to the special symbol lottery without reach.

In many cases, when the special symbol changes, it is linked to the display control of the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 (hereinafter, when these are not distinguished, they are referred to as special symbol indicators 221 and 222). , The image display unit 114 performs an effect using a decorative pattern. The decorative design is configured by displaying, for example, three rows of symbols consisting of a number sequence in which numbers from "1" to "9" are continuously written in the vertical direction. Further, the decorative pattern is displayed in any of a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red. Details will be described later, but for example, the numerical element 411 (FIG. 35 described later) in each decorative pattern is displayed in blue, green, or red. Then, at the same time that the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 221, 222 is started, the decorative symbol displayed on the image display unit 114 starts scrolling. In addition, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (the start of scrolling of the decorative symbol), the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the decorative symbol is also fixedly stopped. In general, when the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, three identical numbers are lined up in a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally in the stop display of the decorative symbol. The effect using the decorative symbol that is performed along with the variable display of this special symbol is called a variable effect.

In the effect with reach, for example, the following operations are performed with respect to the decorative pattern as the variable effect. First, one of the two symbols (sequential sequence) is temporarily stopped before the decorative symbol that scrolls in the vertical (horizontal) direction is fixedly stopped. At this time, the same numbers are temporarily stopped on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. To further explain, if the decorative pattern is scrolled in the vertical direction, the same numbers are temporarily stopped in a row in the horizontal direction.
Next, the last row gradually slows down the scrolling speed, giving the player the expectation that three identical numbers will line up in a straight line. Then, after the last row is temporarily stopped, the three symbols are fixedly stopped.
Here, in the effect with reach, the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect may be performed before the three symbols are fixedly stopped. The SP reach production is generally called super reach or special reach, and is a production that expects a bigger hit than the reach, and is a production of moving images in which various characters appear and the story develops. .. In addition, SPSP reach is generally called super super reach or special special reach, and it is a production that makes you expect a bigger hit than SP reach, and it is a production of moving images in which various characters appear and the story develops. Is.
Further, as shown in FIG. 21 described later, in the present embodiment, the SP reach or the SPSP reach effect is set to be executed when the fluctuation time is longer (for example, 90 seconds or 60 seconds). The above-mentioned variable effect performed together with the effect with reach is also referred to as a variable effect during reach.
On the other hand, in the non-reach effect, by the time the decorative symbol scrolling in the vertical (horizontal) direction is fixed and stopped, the effect that gives the player a sense of expectation, such as the effect with reach, is suppressed, and the horizontal (vertical) or diagonal effect is suppressed. The symbol is fixed and stopped when the same numbers are not aligned on the straight line.

In this way, when the result of the determination of the jackpot random number is incorrect, the reach random number can be produced with a reach as a variable pattern in which the reach effect can be executed on the image display unit 114, or the reach effect can be executed. It is a random number for determining whether to perform a non-reach effect that does not have a fluctuation pattern. In addition, by changing the execution ratio of the effect with reach according to the number of reservations, the player can be given an appropriate sense of expectation while enabling efficient game progress.
In addition, if the jackpot is won, the effect with reach will be performed, and finally the decorative pattern will be fixed and stopped with the same numbers aligned on a straight line extending horizontally (vertically) or diagonally. Can be done. On the other hand, in the case of winning a small hit or losing, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped in the state where the same numbers are not aligned on the above straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used in the ordinary symbol lottery will be described.
With reference to FIG. 20D, the range of random number values is 10 from 0 to 9, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time saving flag is OFF, and as the winning value when the time saving flag is ON. Nine values are assigned. Therefore, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the state of no time saving, the player wins with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the gate 124 and the normal symbol lottery is performed in the time saving state, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

Here, when the time saving flag OFF is described as an example, the winning random number value (see S1003) acquired when the game ball of the gate 124, the first starting port 121, or the second starting port 122 passes through is shown in FIG. 20 (see S1003). It is determined whether or not the value matches "0", which is the winning value of the time saving flag OFF in d). Although detailed description is omitted, the same applies to the ordinary symbol lottery with the time saving flag ON.

Further, although not particularly shown, it is possible to set a plurality of hits having different contents (opening pattern of the electric tulip 123) of the auxiliary game to be performed when it is determined to be a hit in the ordinary symbol lottery. In this case, for example, a winning symbol random number for specifying the winning type in the normal symbol lottery is set in the same manner as the jackpot symbol random number for specifying the symbol type in the special symbol lottery (see FIG. 20B). Then, the game control unit 200 acquires the random number value of the hit symbol random number together with the random number value of the hit random number by the gate switch process (see FIG. 10) by the random number acquisition unit 231 and is acquired by the normal symbol determination unit 232. Identify the type of hit based on the random number value.
The range of random numbers, the ratio of winning values, and the values of winning values shown in the configuration example of each random number in FIG. 20 are merely examples, and are not limited to the values shown.

[Example of setting fluctuation pattern]
Next, a variation pattern and a table setting example used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a variation pattern and a table setting example used in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 21 shows a setting example of a low-probability time-saving non-game state. Although not shown, for other gaming states such as the high-probability time-saving gaming state, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process is individually provided.
Further, FIG. 21 shows a setting example when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 121. When the game ball wins in the second starting port 122, a table for setting the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process may be individually provided, or the game ball wins in the first starting port 121. The table to be referred to in some cases may be shared and referred to.

As shown in FIG. 21, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (Yes in S1302 of FIG. 13), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 determines the fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot symbol and the fluctuation pattern random number. .. Specifically, in the special symbol variation control unit 233, the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 matches any of the variation pattern random number values assigned to each jackpot symbol. Determine the variation pattern based on what you do. For example, when the jackpot symbol is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern random number is "51", it matches the variation pattern random number range "50 to 69" assigned to "high probability symbol A" in FIG. Therefore, "PB3" is selected as the fluctuation pattern. The special symbol fluctuation time in this "PB3" is "90.18 seconds".

Further, when the determination result of the special symbol lottery is wrong (when No in S1302 of FIG. 13), the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 is based on the hold number U1 of the first special symbol lottery, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number. To determine the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, when the hold number U1 of the first special symbol lottery is "0", the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 receives the reach random number value (see S903) acquired by the random number acquisition unit 231 together with the jackpot random number value. , It is determined whether the number is allocated to the reach random number range "0 to 21" or the reach random number range "22 to 249" allocated to the reserved number "0" of "off" in FIG. When the acquired reach random number is included in the reach random number range "0 to 21", the variation pattern random number value (see S903) acquired together with the jackpot random number value by the random number acquisition unit 231 is the reach random number range "0 to 21". The variation pattern is determined based on which of the variation pattern random number values assigned to "21" is matched. For example, when the fluctuation pattern random number is "51", it matches the fluctuation pattern random number range "50 to 89", so "PR4" is selected as the fluctuation pattern.

As described above, the game control unit 200 has the fluctuation pattern random value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired when the game ball wins the start ports 121 and 122, and the game state and reach of the pachinko game machine 100. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the conditions such as the presence or absence of the effect and the number of holds. Then, the information on the fluctuation pattern of the determined special symbol is included in the fluctuation start command, and is sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. As will be described later, the effect control unit 300 corresponds to the variation time specified based on the information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command (executable in the variation time) as the effect when the special symbol changes. Is selected and executed.

[Structure of the RAM of the game control unit and the RAM of the effect control unit for performing the advance notice effect based on the prior determination]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 and the RAM 303 of the effect control unit 300 in the present embodiment for executing the advance notice effect based on the prior determination will be described.
FIG. 22 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 3) of the game control unit 200 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the storage area 204, and FIG. 22B is a block diagram showing the configuration of each of the storage units shown in FIG. 22A.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the RAM 203 includes a storage area 204 as a special symbol hold storage area for storing the jackpot random numbers acquired by the jackpot random number lottery. The storage area 204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first starting port 121 and the number of holdings of the second starting port 122 (when the upper limit of each holding number is 4). .. Specifically, the storage area 204 includes a first storage unit 204a, a second storage unit 204b, a third storage unit 204c, a fourth storage unit 204d, a fifth storage unit 204e, a sixth storage unit 204f, and a seventh storage unit. It has a unit 204g and an eighth storage unit 204h.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22B, each of these storage units 204a to 204h is an area in which information indicating the distinction between the winning start ports (first start port 121 or second start port 122) is stored. It has an area where the acquired jackpot random number is stored, an area where the symbol random number is stored, an area where the reach random number is stored, and an area where the variation pattern random number is stored. That is, a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are stored in each of the storage units 204a to 204h.

Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit 204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit 204a to the eighth storage unit 204h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit 204a. Further, for example, when a random number is already stored in the first storage unit 204a to the fourth storage unit 204d, the acquired random number is stored in the fifth storage unit 204e.

FIG. 23 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3) of the effect control unit 300 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 (a) is a block diagram showing the configurations of the reserved storage areas 305 and 306, and FIG. 23 (b) is a block diagram showing the configurations of the storage units shown in FIG. 23 (a).
As shown in FIG. 23A, the RAM 303 includes a first hold storage area 305 and a second hold storage area 306 as hold status storage areas for storing the state in which the hold ball is held. The first reserved storage area 305 and the second reserved storage area 306 correspond to a hold for winning a prize in the first starting port 121 and a holding for winning a prize in the second starting port 122, respectively, and each has four storage units. Have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area 305 has a first storage unit 305a, a second storage unit 305b, a third storage unit 305c, and a fourth storage unit 305d. Further, the second reserved storage area 306 has a first storage unit 306a, a second storage unit 306b, a third storage unit 306c, and a fourth storage unit 306d.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23B, each of these storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d has a hold flag storage area for turning on / off the hold flag and a notification flag storage for turning on / off the notification flag. Has an area and. The hold flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a hold ball for each of the storage units 305a to 305d and 306a to 306d. That is, for example, when the number of holdings due to winning the first starting port 121 is 3, the holding flag is turned ON in the three holding flag storage areas of the 1st to 3rd storage units 305a, 305b, and 305c. The notification flag is a flag for setting whether or not to perform the advance notice effect for each reserved ball based on the preliminary determination result. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 can set whether or not to perform a preliminary effect based on the preliminary determination result according to the game state and the state of the effect. Therefore, the notification flag is turned ON when the advance notice effect is performed, and the notification flag is turned OFF when the advance notice effect is not performed. The details will be described later, but as a result of the pre-determination effect selection process (S2703), for example, when the advance notice effect is performed on the third reserved ball among the above three reserved balls, the third memory that is the target of the pre-determination In the notification flag storage area of unit 305c, the notification flag is turned ON.

Further, although not particularly shown, the RAM 203 has an area in which pre-determination information is stored (hereinafter, a pre-determination information storage area), in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 22A. The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) based on each of the above random numbers. The content of the pre-judgment information is the same as the information obtained as various judgment results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 11). If this is the case, it is information for indicating that the type of the symbol and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) are the lengths at which the reach effect can be executed, or the content of the fluctuation pattern. The pre-judgment information stored in the pre-judgment information storage area is unique to the hold information (hereinafter referred to as hold information) corresponding to the winning ball (holding ball) for which the pre-judgment processing has been performed, or separately from this hold information. At the timing, it is included in the pre-determination result command and sent from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
Next, the pre-determination process (see S904 and S911 in FIG. 9) will be described in detail.
In the pre-judgment process in the present embodiment, by executing the same determination as the special symbol process (see FIG. 11), whether or not the special symbol process determines a jackpot, in other words, the fluctuation determines a jackpot. Judge whether or not. Specifically, the game control unit 200 performs the preliminary determination as follows using a random number table similar to the random number configuration example described with reference to FIGS. 20 and 21.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination process (S904, S911 in FIG. 9) according to the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 24, the game control unit 200 first determines whether or not the game state is a high-probability state (S2401), and if it determines that the game state is a high-probability state (Yes in S2401), the game control unit 200 is for the high-probability state. A table is selected and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2402). On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2401, the table for the low probability state is selected, and the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number are pre-determined (S2403).

After the pre-determination of the jackpot random number and the jackpot symbol random number of S2402 or S2403, the game control unit 200 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (S2404), and determines that the game state is the time saving state (Yes in S2404). A table for the time saving state is selected, and the reach random number is pre-determined (S2405). Further, a table for the time saving state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2406).
On the other hand, when it is determined as No in S2404, the table for the time saving stateless state is selected and the reach random number is pre-determined (S2407). Further, a table for the time saving stateless state is selected, and the fluctuation pattern random number is pre-determined (S2408).

After that, the game control unit 200 obtains the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot random number obtained as described above, the result of the pre-determination of the jackpot symbol random number, the result of the pre-determination of the reach random number, and the result of the pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. It is stored in the pre-determination information storage area as the pre-determination information (S2409). Further, in order to transmit the pre-determination information to the effect control unit 300, a pre-determination result command including the pre-determination information is set in the RAM 203 (S2410).

Here, the above-mentioned pre-judgment includes a random number value (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122, and a determination table used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 20). This was performed using a judgment table having the same configuration as (see). That is, the determination itself after selecting the determination table to be used is the same as the determination in the jackpot determination process (see S1201 in FIG. 12). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the subroutine of the jackpot determination process (see S1108 and FIG. 12 in FIG. 11) used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) is called to determine the random number in the above-mentioned preliminary determination.

With such a configuration, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a processing function (subroutine) for determining a random number separately from the jackpot determination process in order to determine the random number in the pre-determination process. Therefore, the number of control instructions can be reduced, and an increase in the size of the program related to the jackpot determination process and the pre-determination process can be suppressed. Further, as described above, when the determination table used for the pre-judgment has the same configuration as the determination table used for the jackpot determination, the determination table used for the jackpot determination may also be used for the pre-judgment.

Further, although only the preliminary determination (whether or not it is a big hit) regarding the special symbol lottery has been described here, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading (preliminary determination) is also performed for the fluctuation pattern in the special symbol lottery. For the selection of the variation pattern in the special symbol lottery, the random value for the variation pattern selection (see S903 and S910 in FIG. 9) and the variation pattern table (see FIG. 21) acquired according to the winning of the game ball to the starting ports 121 and 122. (See) and (see S1109 and FIG. 13 in FIG. 11). Therefore, even in the look-ahead of the fluctuation pattern, the random value for selecting the fluctuation pattern acquired at the time of winning and the look-ahead table having the same configuration as the fluctuation pattern table used in the fluctuation pattern selection processing of the special symbol processing are used for selection. Fluctuation patterns can be pre-read.

In this case, in order to pre-read the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process, the subroutine of the variation pattern selection process used in the special symbol process (see FIG. 11) (see S1109 and FIG. 13 in FIG. 11) is called and used. be able to. Further, as the look-ahead table used for pre-reading the variation pattern selection, the variation pattern table used in the variation pattern selection process of the special symbol processing may be used. With this configuration, the number of control instructions related to look-ahead of variation pattern selection can be reduced, and an increase in the size of the program can be suppressed.

If the pre-judgment process and the jackpot judgment process at the time of special symbol change are performed by the same subroutine using the same judgment table group, the execution time of each process is different, so that the pre-judgment result and the special symbol change time. The judgment result by the jackpot judgment processing of the above may be different. That is, it is a case where the gaming state (high probability state or low probability state, time saving state or time saving no state) of the pachinko gaming machine 100 has changed by the start of the special symbol change after the execution of the pre-determination process. In this case, since different types of judgment tables are used depending on the game state, the specific judgment table used for the judgment differs between the time when the pre-judgment process is executed and the time when the jackpot judgment process is executed. .. Therefore, even if the same random number value acquired at the time of winning the starting ports 121 and 122 is used, the preliminary determination result and the determination result of the jackpot determination process may differ. In such a case, if the game state changes by the start of the special symbol change after the pre-determination process is executed in the effect control unit 300, the effect based on the pre-determination result is not executed (prohibited) control or the like. You may do.

[Command configuration and transmission method]
Here, the configuration and transmission method of commands (commands for effect control and commands for setting) output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 25-1 is a diagram showing a command configuration. FIG. 25-1 (a) shows the data structure of the command, and FIG. 25-1 (b) shows the structure as a bit string of the command.

As shown in FIG. 25-1 (a), one command is composed of two bytes in the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. This command is composed of a 1-byte "code" as a first data part and a 1-byte "data" as a second data part. "Code" indicates the type of command, and "data" indicates the value of the command. This command is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 by using one serial signal and using the pace synchronization. More generally, the "code" which is the first data part is the size of a bit (a is an integer of 2 or more), and the value of the first 1 bit is specified as either 1 or 0. , The "data" which is the second data part has a size of n × a bit (n is an integer of 1 or more), and the value of the first 1 bit is different from the value of the first 1 bit of the first data part. Specified by value.

Since the pace synchronization is used, a 1-bit start bit (bit described as "S" in the figure) is provided at the beginning of each of the "code" and "data" constituting the command, and 1 is provided at the end. The end bit of the bit (the bit described as "E" in the figure) is provided. Further, each of the "code" and the "data" constituting the command is provided with a 1-bit parity bit (a bit described as "P" in the figure).

As shown in FIG. 25-1 (a), both the "code" and the "data" constituting the command have a data size of 1 byte (8 bits). Then, when transmitted, the "code" and the "data" are provided with a start bit, an end bit, and a parity bit, respectively. Therefore, in the effect control unit 300 that receives the command, it is not easy to identify whether the received data string is the "code" or the "data" of the command from the outer shape of the data string. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a flag for identifying the "code" and the "data" is set. Specifically, the value of the specific part of the 8-bit value constituting the "code" and the value of the part corresponding to the specific part of the "code" among the 8-bit values constituting the "data" are made different. ..

In the example shown in FIG. 25-1 (b), the first bit of each of the "code" and the "data" is used as a flag. That is, in the 8-bit value constituting the "code", the value of the first 1 bit is set to "1", and in the 8-bit value constituting the "data", the value of the first 1 bit is set to "0". .. As a result, the effect control unit 300 can identify whether the data string is "code" or "data" by examining the value of the first 1 bit following the start bit of the received data string. Note that the specific value of the flag is merely an example, and a value different from the value shown above may be used as long as the "code" and the "data" can be distinguished.

Here, since the value of the first bit of the "code" is specified as "1", the range of values that the "code" can take is 128 from 10000000B (= 80H) to 11111111B (= FFH). Is. The letter "B" attached to each value indicates that it is in binary notation, and the letter "H" indicates that it is in hexadecimal notation. Further, since the value of the first bit of "data" is specified as "0", the range of values that "data" can take is 128 from 00000000000B (= 00H) to 01111111B (= 7FH). is there. That is, according to the configurations shown in FIGS. 25-1 (a) and 25-1 (b), 128 types of commands that can take 128 types of values can be set.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, many kinds of effects are executed according to the gaming state, the determination result of the special symbol lottery, and the like. Therefore, a large number of commands for effect control are prepared. In particular, the above 128 "data", which are values indicating the specific contents of the command, may be insufficient. On the other hand, the number of "codes" indicating the types of commands is usually smaller than the above 128. Therefore, it is conceivable to use a part of the bit string of the "code" to describe the value of the "data".

For example, consider the case where the last 1 bit of the "code" is used to describe the value of the "data". Hereinafter, each bit in the 8-bit bit string constituting the "code" and "data" will be referred to as a first bit to an eighth bit. In addition, the value of "code" that actually indicates the type of command is called "code value" separately from the bit string that constitutes "code", and the value of the command is actually set separately from the bit string that constitutes "data". The value of the indicated "data" is called a "data value". Then, the code value is described using the 1st to 7th bits of the "code" bit string, and the data value is the entire bit string of the "data" (1st to 8th bits). , Is described using the 8th bit of the "code".

With this configuration, the possible range of the code value is 1000000B (= 40H) to 1111111B (= 7FH) because the value of the first bit is specified as "1" and the size is 7 bits as a whole. ) Up to 64. In addition, the range of data values that can be taken is 128, in which the value of the first bit is represented by 8 bits of "data" specified as "0", and the values of the 8th bit of "code" are "0" and ". In total, there are 256 pieces. Therefore, it is possible to set a command having 256 kinds of values as data values.

It should be noted that the above configuration in the case of describing the data value using a part of the "code" is merely an example, and the specific number of bits and the value are not limited to the above configuration example. For example, it may be configured to describe the data value using the 7th bit and the 8th bit of the "code". More generally, a predetermined type of data (data value) is used by using a predetermined bit constituting the "code" which is the first data unit and a bit constituting the "data" which is the second data unit. Is recorded. Then, other types of data (code values) different from the predetermined types of data (data values) are recorded by using the remaining bits other than the above-mentioned predetermined bits in the "code" which is the first data unit. To. In other words, the a bit that constitutes the second data part "data" and the b bit that constitutes the first data part "code" (b is smaller than a-1 and is an integer of 1 or more). In use, data values of the size of the (a + b) bits are recorded.

Further, as a means for increasing the number of data values that can be handled, it is conceivable to increase the bit string of "data" that describes the data values. For example, it is conceivable to prepare "first data" and "second data" as bit strings for describing data values. In this case, if each bit string is 8 bits, the data value can be described by a total of 16 bits. If the second bit of the 8-bit bit string is used as a flag in order to distinguish between the "first data" and the "second data", for example, the first bit and the second bit of the "first data" Can be set to "00B", and the first and second bits of the "second data" can be set to "01B". The first bit has a value of "0" as a flag for identifying the "code". That is, the "data" which is the second data part is every 8 bits (more generally) which is the size of the bit strings ("first data", "second data", ...) Representing individual data values. , For each a bit above), the same value as the value of the first 1 bit is set.

With this configuration, the range of possible values for the "first data" is 64 from 0000000000B (= 00H) to 001111111B (= 3FH), and the range of possible values for the "second data" is Since there are 64 pieces from 01000000B (= 40H) to 01111111B (= 7FH), the total number is 4096 (= 64 × 64). Here, the first bit is used as a flag for distinguishing the "code" and the "data" (the "first data" and the "second data"), and the "first data" and the "second data" are used. Although the second bit is used as the flag for identifying the above, the flag for identifying the four types of bit strings may be set by using the first and second bits. For example, the "code" may have the values of the first and second bits set to "11B", and the "data" may have the values of the first and second bits set to any of "00B", "01B", and "10B". Conceivable.

[Configuration example for command output in RAM of game control unit]
FIG. 25-2 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a command storage area in the RAM 203.
As shown in FIG. 25-2, the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200 has a command storage area (storage area) to which individual commands generated by various processes such as the main control process shown in FIG. 8 are assigned. .. In the example shown in FIG. 25-2, 31 command storage areas from the area 01 to the area 031 are set in the RAM 203. Here, the allocation of commands to each command storage area does not necessarily have a one-to-one correspondence. For example, multiple commands that are not generated at the same time can be assigned to the same command storage area. In the example shown in FIG. 25-2, a plurality of commands are assigned to the area 01, the area 09, the area 012, the area 019, the area 020, the area 021, the area 022, the area 023, and the area 030, and other commands. One command is assigned to each storage area.

In the example shown in FIG. 25-2, a command related to power-on is assigned to the area 01. The command related to the power-on includes a command for controlling the power-on when the RAM is cleared and a command for controlling the power-on when the RAM is restored. Since these commands are generated in different scenes, they are not generated at the same time, and all of them are assigned to the area 01.

Three commands (described as "starting port 1 winning" in the figure) relating to winning a prize in the first starting port 121 are assigned to the areas 02 to 04. One of the commands related to winning the first starting port 121 is a command indicating the result of the determination (look-ahead) in the preliminary determination (see S904 in FIG. 9) based on the winning of the first starting port 121 (in the figure, "Special Figure 1". It is described as "symbol look-ahead") and is assigned to the area 02. The other one is a command (described as "special figure 1 variation pattern look-ahead" in the figure) indicating a look-ahead (pre-judgment) result of the fluctuation pattern specified together with the determination result, and is assigned to the area 03. Yet another is a command indicating that the number of holdings of the special symbol lottery has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the winning of the first starting port 121 ("Special figure 1 holding (+1)" in the figure. ), And it is assigned to the area 04.

Areas 05 to 07 are assigned three commands (described as "starting port 2 winning" in the figure) relating to winning the second starting port 122. One of the commands related to winning the second starting port 122 is a command indicating the judgment result in the preliminary judgment (see S911 in FIG. 9) based on the winning of the second starting port 122 (in the figure, "special figure 2 symbol look-ahead"). ), And it is assigned to the area 05. The other is a command (described as "special figure 2 variation pattern look-ahead" in the figure) that indicates the look-ahead result of the variation pattern specified together with the determination result, and is assigned to the area 06. Yet another is a command indicating that the number of holdings of the special symbol lottery has been updated (here, the value has been increased by 1) based on the winning of the second starting port 122 ("Special figure 2 holding (+1)" in the figure. ), And it is allocated to the area 07.

In areas 08 to 010, there are five commands related to the normal symbol lottery (in the figure, "Public map hold", "Public map type", "Public map confirmation", "Public map open / close", and "Public map hold", respectively. Described) is assigned. Among the commands related to the normal symbol lottery, one of the "normal symbol hold" commands indicates that the number of hold of the normal symbol lottery has been updated (here, the value is increased by 1) based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate 124. It is a command (described as "Public figure hold (+1)" in the figure) and is assigned to the area 08. The "normal symbol type" command specifies a normal symbol representing the judgment result in the normal symbol lottery, and indicates that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 223 has started (described as "normal symbol fluctuation start" in the figure). Is allocated to area 09. The "normal symbol confirmation" command is a command indicating that the normal symbol display 223 is stopped and displayed in the ordinary symbol lottery, and the ordinary symbol representing the judgment result of the ordinary symbol lottery is confirmed (in the figure, "ordinary symbol confirmation"). Described), and is allocated to the area 09. The "Open / Closed Principle" command is a command (indicated as "Open / Closed Principle" in the figure) indicating that the electric tulip 123, which is an ordinary electric accessory, is operated (auxiliary game) based on the judgment result of the ordinary symbol lottery. Yes, it is allocated to area 09. The other one of the "Public figure hold" commands is a command indicating that the number of holds has been updated (here, the value has been reduced by 1) due to the processing of the normal symbol lottery (in the figure, "Public figure hold (-" 1) ”) and is assigned to area 010.

Here, in the process of the ordinary symbol lottery, the variation display of the ordinary symbol, the stop display of the ordinary symbol, and the operation of the electric tulip 123 by the auxiliary game are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Then, the variation display of the normal symbol based on the fact that another game ball has passed through the gate 124 is not started while the electric tulip 123 is operating (see FIG. 16). Therefore, none of the above-mentioned three types of commands, "Public map type", "Public map confirmation", and "Public map opening / closing", are generated at the same time. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 25-2, these three types of commands are assigned to the same command storage area (area 09).

Nine commands related to the special symbol lottery (indicated as "special figure fluctuation" and "special figure special electric train" in the figure) are assigned to the areas 011 to 014. Among the commands related to the special symbol lottery, one of the "special symbol fluctuation" commands is a command indicating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 (high probability state or low probability state, time saving state or time saving no state) ( In the figure, it is described as "gaming state") and is assigned to the area 011. The other one of the "special symbol fluctuation" commands is to specify a special symbol representing the judgment result of the special symbol lottery in the special symbol lottery, and to display variations of the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222. Is a command (described as "special figure designation" in the figure) indicating that the above is started, and is assigned to the area 012. Yet another one of the "special symbol variation" commands is a command for specifying the variation pattern of the special symbol variation performed in the special symbol lottery (described as "variation pattern" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 013. Yet another one of the "special figure fluctuation" commands is a command indicating that the number of holds has been updated (here, the value has been reduced by 1) due to the processing of the special symbol lottery (in the figure, "special figure hold (in the figure)". -1) ”), and it is assigned to the area 014.

On the other hand, one of the "special figure special electric train" commands is a command indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state (described as "customer waiting" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 012. The other one of the "special electric train" commands is a command (in the figure, "special electric power") indicating that the special electric accessory, the large winning opening 125, is operated (special game, big hit game) based on the judgment result of the special symbol lottery. It is described as "open") and is allocated to the area 012. Yet another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (described as "big hit OP" in the figure) indicating that the opening operation of the jackpot game has started, and is assigned to the area 012. Yet another one of the "special figure special electric" commands is a command (described as "big hit ED" in the figure) indicating that the ending operation of the jackpot game has started, and is assigned to the area 012. Yet another one of the "special symbol special electric" commands is that the first special symbol display 221 and the second special symbol display 222 are stopped and displayed, and the special symbol representing the judgment result of the special symbol lottery is confirmed. It is a command (described as "special figure confirmation" in the figure) and is assigned to the area 012.

Here, in the process of the special symbol lottery, the variable display of the special symbol, the stop display of the special symbol, and the operation of the large winning opening 125 by the special game are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Then, during the execution of the special game, the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of another game ball is not started (see FIG. 11). Further, in the jackpot game, the opening operation, the operation of the big winning opening 125, and the ending operation are sequentially executed as a series of operations. Therefore, neither the "special figure designation" command nor the five types of "special figure special electric" commands in the above "special figure variation" command are generated at the same time. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 25-2, these six types of commands are assigned to the same command storage area (area 012).

Four commands related to switch detection (denoted as "switch pass" in the figure) are assigned to regions 015 to 018. One of the commands related to switch detection is a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the gate 124L on the left side of the game area 111 (described as “passing through the left gate” in the figure), and is assigned to the area 015. The other command related to switch detection is a command indicating that the game ball has passed through the gate 124R on the right side of the game area 111 (described as "passing through the right gate" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 016. .. Yet another command related to switch detection is a command indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 122 (described as "passing through the starting port SW2 (electric chew)" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 017. Has been done. Yet another command related to switch detection is a command indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the grand prize opening 125 (described as "large winning opening winning" in the figure), and is assigned to the area 018.

Commands related to errors (denoted as "error" in the figure) are assigned to areas 019 to 030. The errors detected by the game control unit 200 of the pachinko game machine 100 include, for example, a full tank error indicating that the payout ball is full in the plate 153 (see FIGS. 1 and 2), and the front surface of the frame member 150. Door opening error indicating that the frame is open, payout error indicating that the payout unit cannot pay out the game ball, various detection switches such as gate switch 214 and start port switches 211 and 212 have not been released yet. There is a switch unconnected error indicating that the connection is established. In the example shown in FIG. 25-2, these errors are assigned to regions 019 to 023, respectively. For each error, there is a command indicating that each error has occurred (described as "~ error start" in the figure) and a command indicating that each error has been resolved (described as "~ error end" in the figure). , Are assigned to the same command storage area.

In addition, various control items and error items are set according to the specifications and functions of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and commands according to the control items, commands indicating that an error has occurred, and errors have been resolved depending on the type of error. It may be configured to generate a command or the like indicating that. Then, these commands can be appropriately assigned to the command storage area. In the example shown in FIG. 25-2, commands related to various errors are individually assigned to areas 024 to 030. Further, a command for detecting and notifying a specific winning prize (described as "winning notification designation" in the figure) is assigned to the area 031.

As described above, in the command storage area provided in the RAM 203 of the game control unit 200, one type or a plurality of types of commands are associated with one command storage area. Then, in the main control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control unit 200 stores the generated command in the command storage area associated with the command.
Here, in the main control process, not all commands are always generated every time one cycle of the process is executed. For example, when there is no winning in the first starting port 121 or the second starting port 122, the command related to winning in the starting ports 121 and 122 and the "special figure variation" command are not generated. In addition, among the commands related to the normal symbol lottery, the "open / close" command and the "special electric train" command are not generated unless the timing for operating these electric accessories is required. In addition, the command related to the occurrence of an error is not generated unless an error has occurred in the first place.
Therefore, when the output process of the main control process (see S806 in FIG. 8) is performed, the command is usually stored in some command storage areas among the command storage areas provided in the RAM 203. No command is stored in the other command storage area.

[Command output operation]
FIG. 25-3 is a flowchart showing the contents of output processing by the output control unit 240.
In this embodiment, the output control unit 240 pays attention to the command storage area of the RAM 203 shown in FIG. 25-2 in order from the top (in order of the area number), and outputs the commands stored in each command storage area. ..

As shown in FIG. 25-3, the output control unit 240 of the game control unit 200 first has a command storage area at the head of the command storage area provided in the RAM 203 (area 01 in the example shown in FIG. 25-2). (S2501), and check whether or not the command is stored (S2502). Then, if the command is stored (Yes in S2502), the output control unit 240 reads the stored command and outputs it to the effect control unit 300 (S2503).

When the command is not stored in the command storage area (initially area 01) of interest (No in S2502), or after outputting the command stored in the command storage area in S2503, the output control unit 240 , Checks if there is a command storage area with the next area number (S2504). When there is the next command storage area (Yes in S2504), the output control unit 240 pays attention to the command storage area (S2505), returns to S2502, confirms the presence or absence of the command (S2502), and outputs (S2503). repeat. Then, if processing is performed on the last command storage area (area 031 in the example shown in FIG. 25-2), the output processing ends because there is no command storage area with the next area number (No in S2504). To do.

[Set command output order]
In the main control process, when a command is generated in each process described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19, the generated command is usually stored in the corresponding command storage area of the RAM 203. That is, the commands are generally stored in the command storage area in the order in which the commands are generated.
On the other hand, as described with reference to FIG. 25-3, in the output processing by the output control unit 240, each command storage area is focused and stored in a certain order (in the above example, in the order of the area number). Output the command. That is, the commands are output in a predetermined specific order regardless of the order in which the commands are generated. This is because it may be desirable that specific commands are transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in a specific order in order to prevent confusion in the effect control of the effect control unit 300 based on commands. That is, since the effect control unit 300 executes the effect control based on the command in the order of receiving from the game control unit 200, confusion such as a contradiction may occur in the effect control due to the difference in the order of receiving the commands. , This needs to be prevented.

In addition, according to the command output from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 as described above, the effect control unit 300 controls, for example, the image display unit 114, the board lamp 116, the speaker 156, the frame lamp 157, and the like. For example, when the effect control unit 300 receives a command indicating the start of a door opening error, the effect control unit 300 displays a message "Please call a staff member" or an image indicating an abnormal state. It is displayed on 114. In addition, the effect control unit 300 limits the output of an alarm or the like indicating an abnormal state from the speaker 156 and the output of music, voice, sound effects, or the like. In addition, the effect control unit 300 lights the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157 in red, for example, as a mode of indicating an abnormal state.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control unit 300 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the operation of the effect control unit 300.
The operation of the effect control unit 300 includes the main process shown in FIG. 26 (a) and the interrupt process shown in FIG. 26 (b). With reference to FIG. 26A, the effect control unit 300 first makes initial settings at startup (S2601), sets the cycle of the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) (S2602), and then follows the set cycle. , While updating the random number used in the effect control (S2603), the interrupt process is accepted.

The interrupt processing is periodically performed according to the cycle set in S2602. Referring to FIG. 26B, in this interrupt process, the effect control unit 300 receives a command from the game control unit 200 and performs a command reception process (S2611). In this command reception process, the effect content (effect pattern) is selected. In addition, the effect control unit 300 performs an effect button process for accepting an operation of the effect button 161 or the like by the player (S2612). After that, the effect control unit 300 performs a command transmission process of transmitting a command including information of the selected effect pattern to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 (S2613). As a result, the image display and sound output to the image display unit 114, the operation of the movable accessory 115, the light emission of the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157, and the like are performed.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (S2611 in FIG. 26B).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command have been received (S2701). The pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command are set in the start port switch process shown in FIG. 9 in the game control unit 200 (S906, S907, S913, S914), and the output process (S806) shown in FIG. ) Is a command transmitted to the effect control unit 300.
Then, when the effect control unit 300 determines that the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command have been received (Yes in S2701), the value of the hold number held in the RAM 303 is added by 1 (S2702). Further, the effect control unit 300 performs the pre-determination effect selection process based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2703). The content of the pre-determination effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not the pre-determination result command or the hold number increase command (No in S2701), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is the fluctuation start command (S2704). This fluctuation start command is a command set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 (S1111) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is a fluctuation start command (Yes in S2704), the effect control unit 300 executes the effect selection process (S2705). Further, when the fluctuation start command is received, a random value for effect control used in the effect selection process is acquired. This random number value is a random number value that is periodically updated in S2603 of the main process shown in FIG. 26 (a). The details of the effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, or a fluctuation start command (No in S2701 and S2704), the effect control unit 300 determines whether or not the received command is a fluctuation stop command (S2706). This fluctuation stop command is a command set in the game control unit 200 in the special symbol processing shown in FIG. 11 (S1114) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is a fluctuation stop command (Yes in S2706), the effect control unit 300 executes the processing during the end of the variation effect (S2707). In the process during the end of the variation effect, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the received variation stop command and sets the variation effect end command for instructing the end of the effect of the symbol variation in the RAM 303.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command (No in S2701, S2704, and S2706), the effect control unit 300 starts the opening operation of the jackpot game with the received command. It is determined whether or not it is an opening command for the command (S2708). This opening command is a command that was set in the stopped processing shown in FIG. 14 (S1418) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output processing (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in S2708), the effect control unit 300 executes the jackpot effect selection process (S2709). The details of the jackpot effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, or an opening command (No in S2701, S2704, S2706, and S2708), the effect control unit 300 receives a jackpot game. It is determined whether or not the ending command is for starting the ending operation of (S2710). This ending command is a command that was set in the large winning opening process shown in FIG. 17 (S1713) and transmitted to the effect control unit 300 in the output process (S806) shown in FIG.
When the received command is an ending command (Yes in S2710), the effect control unit 300 executes the ending effect selection process (S2711). The details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a pre-judgment result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, or an ending command (No in S2701, S2704, S2706, S2708, and S2710), then the effect control unit 300 , The customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state is executed (S2712). Specifically, when the effect control unit 300 receives the customer wait command, the effect control unit 300 sets the customer wait effect command for performing the customer wait effect (demo effect) in the RAM 303 and ends the customer wait command reception process.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pre-determination effect selection process (S2703) and the effect selection process (S2705) of FIG. 27.
In the pre-determination effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the pre-determination result command received from the game control unit 200 (S2801). Further, the effect control unit 300 analyzes the hold number increase command received from the game control unit 200 (S2802). Then, the effect control unit 300 selects an effect pattern (pre-determination effect pattern) used in the pre-determination effect based on the pre-determination result command and the hold number increase command (S2803).

Here, as the pre-judgment effect pattern, various effect patterns can be provided to foretell the random number determination result by the special symbol processing before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. For example, an effect such as a hold display effect or a continuous advance notice effect can be provided as a pre-determination effect pattern. In the present embodiment, when a reserved ball is generated, a display indicating the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 218 and the second special symbol hold indicator 219 of the display 130 (see FIG. 2). At the same time, the image display unit 114 is displayed on hold to indicate the occurrence of hold and the number of holds (hold display effect). Therefore, in this hold display effect, the preliminary determination result is reflected in the display mode of the hold display. As a result, it is possible to execute a pre-determination effect that suggests to the player the determination result when the random number is subsequently determined by the special symbol processing for the reserved ball.
In the following description, the hold (right) for which the preliminary determination result is notified by the preliminary determination effect is referred to as a notification target. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, for convenience, the right of the hold, which is the notification target, is referred to as the notification target even after the symbol change is started.

In addition, although the case where the hold display effect is used as the pre-judgment effect has been described here, various advance notice effects can be produced by reflecting it in various effects performed before the start of the fluctuation based on the random number determination result by the special symbol processing. Will be able to do. For example, an effect using an effect image displayed on the image display unit 114, an effect by emitting light from a board lamp 116 or a frame lamp 157, an effect by an operation of a movable accessory, an effect by acoustic output such as music or sound effects, etc. are performed in advance. It can be set as a judgment effect pattern.

Further, the pre-determination effect is executed in accordance with the symbol change for other winning balls performed before the symbol change for the winning ball (reserved ball) for which the pre-determination is performed. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved balls is four per one starting port (first starting port 121 or second starting port 122) (see FIG. 9). In addition, priority shall be given to the digestion of the reserved ball at the second starting port 122. Here, when the upper limit of the reserved balls of the second starting port 122 is set to 4, for example, if a preliminary determination is made for a reserved ball having the second starting port 122, the symbol of the reserved ball is changed. Prior to this, a maximum of four winning balls will be changed in design, including the change that is currently changing (referred to as the change). In the advance notice effect related to the reserved ball for which the pre-judgment has been made, if the symbol change is performed a plurality of times before the symbol change is performed for the reserved ball, the advance notice effect (continuous notice effect) that spans the multiple symbol changes. ) May be performed.

Then, the effect control unit 300 sets the hold number command including the value of the hold number after addition and the information of the pre-determination effect pattern selected in the pre-determination effect selection process in the RAM 303 (S2804). The hold number command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the image / sound control unit 310 of the selected pre-determination effect pattern. By receiving the hold number command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for drawing and outputting the image or sound corresponding to the selected pre-determination effect pattern on the VDP 314. The VDP 314 reads image data and acoustic data for representing the selected pre-determination effect pattern from the CGROM 315 and SNDROM 316 based on the display list and the like, and expresses the pre-determination effect using the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156. ..

In the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S2811). Further, the value of the number of holds held in the RAM 303 is subtracted by 1 (S2812). Then, the effect control unit 300 displays on the image display unit 114 based on various setting information (information such as a symbol type, a game state after a big hit game, a fluctuation pattern, etc.) obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation start command. A variation effect pattern of symbol variation due to an image is selected (S2813).

Finally, the effect control unit 300 sets a variable effect start command in the RAM 303 to instruct the start of execution of the selected effect (S2814). The variation effect start command includes information indicating the pattern in order to notify the CPU 311 of the selected variation effect pattern. By receiving the variation effect start command, the CPU 311 creates a display list or the like for causing the VDP 314 to draw and output the image or sound corresponding to the selected variation effect pattern. Based on the display list or the like, the VDP 314 reads image data or acoustic data for representing the selected variation effect pattern from the CGROM 315 or SNDROM 316, and expresses the variation effect using the image display unit 114 or the speaker 156.

Although not described in detail, in the selection process of the variation effect pattern of the symbol variation in S2813, the variation effect pattern is determined based on the variation pattern. Based on the variation effect pattern determined here, the variation display of the decorative pattern, the background effect, the notice effect, and the like are determined. The decorative symbol variation display is an effect display performed by the image display unit 114 in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol performed by the first special symbol display 221 or the second special symbol display 222. In the variable display of this decorative pattern, a reach effect or the like is executed. In addition, unlike the present embodiment, when a plurality of fluctuation effect patterns are set for the variation pattern, it is one of the effect random numbers (one of the random numbers updated in S2603 of FIG. 26A). , The effect random number value is acquired when the variation start command is received), and the variation effect pattern may be selected by lottery.

Further, in the effect selection process, the decorative symbol to be displayed as the stop symbol is determined in response to the special symbol designation command for designating the special symbol representing the determination result of the special symbol lottery. For example, when a special symbol designation command indicating that the determination result of the special symbol lottery is out of order is received, the effect control unit 300 uses the effect random number to display a decorative symbol (for example, "454") as a stop symbol. ") Is determined (see FIG. 34 (A) described later).
In addition, unlike this description, the image / sound control unit 310 may determine the decorative symbol to be displayed as the stop symbol instead of the effect control unit 300 according to the special figure designation command.

The pre-determination effect selection process and the effect selection process performed by the CPU 301 of the effect control unit 300 are repeatedly executed at predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) intervals. That is, the effect control unit 300 acquires a pre-determination result command, a hold number increase command, a fluctuation start command, or a fluctuation stop command by interrupt processing at predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) intervals, and sends these various commands. Based on this, the pre-judgment effect selection process and the effect selection process are executed.
Further, as described above, the drawing process and the output process performed by the VDP 314 of the image / acoustic control unit 310 are repeatedly executed at predetermined time (for example, 16.6 milliseconds) intervals. That is, the image / sound control unit 310 recognizes that the hold number command or the variation effect start command has been acquired at predetermined time (for example, 16.6 milliseconds) intervals, and executes drawing processing and output processing. ..

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect control unit 300 and the image / sound control unit 310 each process the timing at which the game control unit 200 creates the fluctuation start command. There may be a time lag.

As described above, the effect control unit 300 performs processing at predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) intervals. Therefore, for example, when the effect control unit 300 acquires the variation start command from the game control unit 200 when the effect control unit 300 finishes the effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 performs a new effect selection process for a predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds). ) Will be executed later.
Further, as described above, the image / acoustic control unit 310 performs processing at predetermined time (for example, 16.6 milliseconds) intervals. Therefore, when the image / acoustic control unit 310 recognizes that the variation effect start command is acquired when, for example, the image / acoustic control unit 310 finishes the drawing process and the output process, the image / acoustic control unit 310 performs a new drawing process or an output process. It will be executed after a predetermined time (for example, 16.6 milliseconds).

From the above, a maximum of several tens of milliseconds (for example, 4) from the game control unit 200 creating the fluctuation start command until the image / sound control unit 310 finally performs processing based on the fluctuation start command. A delay of milliseconds + for example 16.6 milliseconds) may occur. Therefore, the decorative symbol displayed on the image display unit 114 controlled by the image / acoustic control unit 310 (small to be described later) with respect to the timing of the start of fluctuation of the special symbol on the display 130 controlled by the game control unit 200. The timing of the start of fluctuation of (including the symbol) may be delayed.

Similarly, a maximum of several tens of milliseconds (for example, 4) from the game control unit 200 creating the fluctuation stop command until the image / sound control unit 310 finally performs processing based on the fluctuation stop command. A delay of milliseconds + for example 16.6 milliseconds) may occur. Therefore, the decorative symbol displayed on the image display unit 114 controlled by the image / acoustic control unit 310 (small to be described later) with respect to the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol on the display 130 controlled by the game control unit 200. The timing of the fluctuation stop of (including the symbol) may be delayed.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the timing of the change start or stop of the special symbol may be different from the timing of the change start or stop of the decorative symbol. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol may be different.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot effect selection process (S2709) of FIG. 27.
In this jackpot effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received opening command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3001), and selects an effect pattern (big hit effect pattern) (S3002). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and acoustic data used for the effect according to the selected jackpot effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the jackpot effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, and sets the RAM 303. The jackpot effect selection process ends (S3003). As a result, the production during the big hit is determined. In the selection of the jackpot effect pattern (S3002), a determination may be made based on a random number value acquired when a command is received. The jackpot effect can be regarded as an effect performed when the jackpot game related to the determination and fluctuation of the previous special symbol lottery is executed.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (S2711) of FIG. 27.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit 300 first analyzes the received ending command (including information about the type of jackpot symbol) (S3101), and selects an effect pattern (ending effect pattern) (S3102). .. Then, the effect control unit 300 reads the image data and acoustic data used for the effect according to the selected ending effect pattern from the ROM 302, sets the ending effect start command instructing the selected effect together with these data in the RAM 303, and sets the RAM 303. The ending effect selection process ends (S3103). In the selection of the ending effect pattern (S3102), a determination may be made based on a random number value acquired when the command is received.

When the command reception process is completed as described above, any one of the variable effect start command, the variable effect end command, the jackpot effect start command, the ending effect start command, and the customer waiting effect command is set in the RAM 303.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button processing (S2612 in FIG. 26B).
In this effect button processing, the effect control unit 300 first determines whether or not the operation means such as the effect button 161 by the player has been operated during the predetermined reception period (valid period) (S3301). Here, the operation of the operating means includes pressing the effect button 161 to turn it on, and pressing the center key and surrounding keys of the effect key 162 to turn it ON. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is provided with an operation device other than the effect button 161 and the effect key 162, such as a touch panel, the operation of the device is detected. The effect control unit 300 receives an operation signal from the controller of these devices and detects that the operation has been performed.

If the operation means such as the effect button 161 is operated (Yes in S3301), the effect control unit 300 sets the effect button command including the information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAM 303 and ends the effect button process. (S3302).

After that, the effect control unit 300 performs the command transmission process (S2613) of FIG. 26B, and issues the command set in the RAM 303 by the above command reception process and effect button process to the image / sound control unit 310 and the lamp. It is transmitted to the control unit 320. Then, based on the received command, the image / acoustic control unit 310 and the lamp control unit 320 display the image by the image display unit 114, the sound output by the speaker 156, the operation of the movable accessory 115, and the panel lamp 116 and the frame lamp 157. The set effect is executed by controlling the light emission and the like.

[Initial operation of various drive sources]
Next, the initial operation of various drive sources will be described.
In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko game machine 100 is turned on, various drive sources such as the electric tulip opening / closing part 213 and the grand prize opening door opening / closing part 216 are made before the pachinko game machine 100 can play a game. The initial operation to operate is performed. In the following, the configuration required to perform the initial operation of various drive sources and the operation contents of the initial operation will be described.

In the description given with reference to FIGS. 32 to 56, for convenience of explanation, each component member will be newly added with a reference numeral. That is, the same reference numerals may be attached to different members in the above-mentioned constituent members and the constituent members described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 56.

Further, the electric tulip opening / closing section 213 and the winning opening door opening / closing section 216 described above correspond to the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b, which will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 56, respectively. To do. Further, the above-mentioned pachinko game machine 100, game board 110, rail member 112, game area 111, guide member 113, ordinary winning opening 126 (ordinary winning opening switch 217), gate 124 (gate switch 214), first starting opening 121. (1st start port switch 211), 2nd start port 122 (2nd start port switch 212, electric tulip 123, electric tulip opening / closing part 213), big winning opening 123 (big winning opening switch 215, big winning opening door opening / closing part) 216), Display 130, Movable accessory 115, Image display unit 114, Frame member 150, Sub-board, Main control board, CPU201, RAM203, RAM333, Payout control unit 330, Setting key switch 229, RAM clear switch 228, Information Display 230, external information terminal board 350 for board, switching power supply, frame lamp 157, board lamp 116, speaker 156, status confirmation display 226, touch sensor 233, out ball detection switch 227, first special symbol display 221 2nd special symbol display 222, normal symbol display 223, out port 117, 1st special symbol hold indicator 218, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 219, normal symbol hold indicator 220, round number indicator 225, status The display 224 and the RAM clear are described as a game machine 1, a game board 5, an inner rail 35 and an outer rail 36, a game area 5a, a decorative frame 40, and a general winning opening 43, respectively, with reference to FIGS. 32 to 56. General winning opening detection switch 43a), normal gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first starting port 45 (first starting port detection switch 45a), variable starting unit 46 (second starting port 47, second starting port detection) Switch 47a, 2nd start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, 2nd starting opening opening / closing member 48), 2nd variable winning part 55 (2nd big winning opening 56, 2nd big winning opening detection switch 56a, 2nd big winning opening opening / closing member 57, 2nd prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b), main information display 69, 1st movable member 73a and 2nd movable member 73b, 1st image display device 70, outer frame 2, game board mounting frame 3 and glass frame 4 , Production control board 130 and payout control board 120, main control board 110, main CPU 110a, main RAM 110c, payout RAM 121c, payout control unit 121, setting key switch 112a, RWM clear switch 111a, information display 113, game information output terminal board. 90, power supply board 160, frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 74, audio output device 9, status confirmation display 68, touch sensor 15 a, Out ball detection switch 39a, 1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, out port 39, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67, RWM clear.

[First Embodiment]
(Composition of game board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the configuration of the game board 5 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 5.

The game board 5 is composed of a board unit 500 that constitutes the front side of the game board 5 and a back surface unit 501 that constitutes the rear side of the game board 5.

The board unit 500 has a game plate 500a made of transparent resin in which a game area 5a is formed on the surface of the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 described above, and a window portion is formed so that the rear can be visually recognized. ..

Then, inside the game area 5a of the game board 500a, the above-mentioned decorative frame 40, general winning opening 43, solenoid gate 44 (gate detection switch 44a), first starting port 45 (first starting port detection switch 45a), variable. Starting unit 46 (2nd starting port 47, 2nd starting port detection switch 47a, 2nd starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b), 2nd variable winning section 55 (2nd winning opening 56, 2nd winning opening detection switch 56a, The second prize opening opening / closing member 57 and the second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) are provided, and the main information display 69 is provided outside the game area 5a.

Further, at the lower right portion of the game board 500a, a certificate stamp plate 502 to which a certificate stamp having identification information unique to the game machine 1 is attached is provided so as to be rotatable in the left-right direction with the left side as an axis. Fixtures 503a for detachably attaching the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are provided at the four corners of the 500a.

The fixture 503a located at the lower right of the game plate 500a is normally covered with the certificate stamp plate 502, and is exposed when the right side of the certificate stamp plate is pinched with a fingertip and rotated toward the left side.

The fixture 503a is provided at the tip of the operating portion located on the front side of the game plate 500a, the shaft portion extending from the operating portion to the back surface side of the game plate 500a, and the back surface of the game plate 500a. It is equipped with an engaging piece located on the side, and by operating the operation unit, the engaging piece changes between the first state (non-engaged posture) and the second state (engaged posture). There is.

The back surface unit 501 has a unit base 501a in which the front surface is formed in a concave chamber shape and a window portion that makes the rear view visible is formed. In the concave chamber, a second image display device 71 is formed. , Movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) and the like are provided, and a first image display device 70 is provided behind the window portion. Further, an effect control device 130A having an effect control board 130 is provided behind the first image display device 70, and a main control device 110A having a main control board 110 is provided below the effect control device 130A. ing.

At the four corners of the unit base 501a, fixed receiving portions 503b for detachably attaching the board surface unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 by engaging with the engaging pieces of the fixture 503a described above are provided.

When the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are attached, the certificate stamp plate 502 is opened and the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a are set to the first state (non-engaging posture). Then, the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN derived from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) provided on the board unit 500 is passed through the through hole HA provided on the right side of the back surface unit 501. After that, when the back surface of the board unit 500 and the front surface of the back surface unit 501 are brought into contact with each other, the engaging piece of the fixture 503a is in a state of entering the inside of the fixed receiving portion 503b.

In this state, when the engaging piece is brought into the second state (engaging posture) by turning the operating portions of the four fixtures 503a, the engaging piece engages with the fixed receiving portion 503b, and the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 And are fixed. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN derived from various electronic components (various solenoids, various switches) is connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A and the certificate stamp plate 502 is closed, the board unit 500 is opened. And the installation work of the back unit 501 is completed.

On the other hand, when removing the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501, the male connector CN connected to the female connector of the main control device 110A is pulled out to open the certificate stamp plate 502. After that, when the engaging piece is put into the first state by turning the operating portions of the four fixtures 503a, the engagement between the engaging piece and the fixed receiving portion 503b is released.

In this state, when the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 are separated from each other, the engaging pieces of the four fixtures 503a retract from the fixed receiving portion 503b. After that, when the male connector CN provided at the tip of the harness HN is pulled out from the through hole HA, the removal work of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 is completed.

In the present embodiment, in addition to replacing only the game board 5 (a set of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501), it is also possible to replace only the board unit 500 from the viewpoint of a like-new game machine 1. Therefore, although the attachment / detachment of the board unit 500 and the back surface unit 501 when the game board 5 is not attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described here, the game board 5 which is attached to the game board mounting frame 3 has been described. It is also possible to replace only the board unit 500.

Specifically, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting frame 3, only the back surface unit 501 is fixed to the game board mounting frame 3 via a lock mechanism, and is locked. By preventing the board unit 500 from being fixed by the mechanism, it is possible to replace (like new) only the board unit 500. Therefore, when replacing only the board unit 500, it is preferable to perform the above-mentioned removal operation after opening the glass frame 4.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the main processing on the main control board 110. This main process is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying a power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a performs the initial setting process in step S10. Specifically, a preparatory process for starting the control of the game, a setting change process for changing the set value based on the setting change operation, and a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 110c based on the RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming the set value based on the setting confirmation operation, initial operation of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided on the board unit 500. Performs initial operation processing of the drive source for making the solenoid. The details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S50, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol determination random value and the reach determination random value, and in step S51, the jackpot determination initial random value, the special symbol determination initial random value, the hit determination initial random value, The initial random number value for normal symbol determination is updated.

In step S52, the main CPU 110a detects a voltage drop indicating the occurrence of a voltage drop of the power supply from the power failure detection circuit 162 of the power supply board 160 (for example, the power supply supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine if a signal is being input. If the voltage drop detection signal is not input, the process is transferred to step S50, and if the voltage drop detection signal is input, the process is transferred to step S53.

In step S53, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input is continued for a predetermined period, the process is moved to step S54 assuming that a complete power failure has occurred, and if the input is not continued for a predetermined period, a momentary power failure is possible in which the voltage of the power supply drops for a moment. The process is transferred to step S52 as having the property.

In step S54, the main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption, and in step S55, issues a power cutoff designation command for notifying the payout control board 120 that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, the payout control board 120 that has received the power cutoff designation command transmits the remaining payout number designation command indicating the remaining payout number of the game balls stored in the payout RAM 121c.

In step S56, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the remaining payout number designation command has been received. If the remaining payout number designation command has not been received, the process is moved to step S57, and if the remaining payout number designation command is received, the process is moved to step S58.

In step S57, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the waiting time for waiting for the reception of the remaining payout number designation command has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S56, and if the standby time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S58 assuming that normal communication with the payout control board 120 is not possible.

In step S58, the main CPU 110a saves the number of payouts in the payout counter set in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the remaining payout number specification command is received, the remaining payout number specified by the remaining payout number specification command is saved, and if the remaining payout number specification command is not received, the remaining payout number is specified. Save "0" as the number of payouts. The remaining number of payouts saved here is referred to in the prize ball processing of the timer interrupt, and after the power is restored, a command for specifying the number of payouts according to the number of remaining payouts is transmitted to the payout control board 120. ..

The main CPU 110a clears the output port in step S59. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motor, solenoid) are stopped.

In step S60, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and saves it in a predetermined area of the game RWM area. By doing so, it is possible to determine the data abnormality of the game RWM area by the checksum when the power is turned on next time.

In step S61, the main CPU 110a saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 110c is backed up (power recovery) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S62, prohibits RWM access. After that, wait until the power supply is completely cut off.

In this way, when the supply of the operating power supply (18 volts or more) required for the operation of the game machine 1 is started, the initial setting process is performed, but with the occurrence of a momentary power failure (voltage drop to less than 18 volts). When the supply of operating power is restarted, the initial setting process is not performed. That is, even if the setting change operation, the setting confirmation operation, and the RWM clear operation are performed for some reason when the momentary power failure occurs, the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process are not executed. It is possible to ensure the reliability of the game machine by preventing the machine from performing unintended operations.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S12, and performs startup waiting processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 to start up so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching of the game ball by the launching device.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S17 assuming that the power is restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the power is turned on for the first time or irregular power restoration (steps S18 to step). The process is moved to step S18 assuming that the power is restored from the power failure during execution of S35).

In step S17, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and clears the backup flag saved in the game RWM area.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting change operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process is moved to step S19 as a transition to the setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process is moved to step S20.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for changing (updating) the set value (probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination) at the stage of the advantage degree of the game is performed. The details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S24.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and the checksum calculated in step S17 match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process is transferred to step S21, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is abnormal), the process is performed in step S22. To move.

If the backup flag is not saved, it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, assuming that the power is turned on for the first time or the above-mentioned irregular power recovery is performed, and the process is performed in step S22. Will be transferred.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (during game) area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). When it is determined that the set value in the set value (during game) area is within the appropriate range, the process is transferred to step S23, and when it is determined that the set value in the set value (during game) area is not in the appropriate range. The process is transferred to step S22.

The "set value (during game) area" is an area in which the set value is saved when the setting change mode is not set, and is an area in which the fixed set value is saved. The set value range in the set value (during game) area is "1 to 4", which is a value obtained by adding +1 to the set value in the set value (changing) area.
The "setting value (changing) area" is an area in which the setting value being set is temporarily saved in the setting change mode. The set value range in the set value (changing) area is 0 to 3, which is -1 from the set value in the set value (during game) area.
The term "set value area" means "set value (during game) area" and "set value (changing) area".

In step S22, the main CPU 110a performs non-recoverable error processing (game program). Specifically, after displaying the error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred on the effect control board 130. , Prohibit interrupt interrupts Set interrupt prohibition, and after clearing the output port, output an unrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an unrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, the process of waiting until the power supply is completely cut off is performed. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to the process for executing the non-recoverable error notification indicating that the non-recoverable error has occurred.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which the game is not controlled (it does not shift to the game control), and is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed. Therefore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, even if the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 is turned off and then the power switch is turned on without the setting change operation, the setting is not canceled. The power switch must be turned on with the change operation. During an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" displays an unrecoverable error screen ("Unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to let the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. Or, the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or the sound output device 9 indicates that a recovery error has occurred. It is to output an error sound ("It is an unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S23 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S24 as if the RWM clear operation is performed, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S27.

The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clearing process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, a process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing a region other than the set value region of the RWM region for the game) is performed. The details of the RWM clearing process will be described later.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided on the board unit 500 and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are provided. Performs processing for initial operation over a predetermined period. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S33. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

The "power-on notification" is to display an initial screen (background image and initial effect symbol "135") at the time of power-on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or to display a frame. It indicates that the lighting device 10 and the lighting device 74 for the panel are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the RWM area is initialized from the sound output device 9. The power-on notification sound (“RWM has been cleared” + buzzer sound) is output for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In the power-on notification, the RWM area was cleared on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 instead of displaying the initial screen on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71. A display for notifying that may be displayed.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been a setting confirmation operation. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S28 to shift to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was turned off. The process is transferred to step S30.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, a process is performed to display the set value saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, processing is performed to initially operate the various drive sources (second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) over a predetermined period. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration, such as clearing (clearing 0) the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S31, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of the power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to a process for executing the power restoration notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off by ending the setting confirmation notification and the like.

"Power recovery notification" is to display the power recovery screen for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or for a frame in order to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off. It indicates that the lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74 are all lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), or the power supply from the sound output device 9 is restored (from a power failure). It is to output a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

In step S32, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (special symbol storage designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures, and the image display device is subjected to processing for displaying the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52, which will be described later.

In step S33, the main CPU 110a transmits a set value designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the current set value. The setting value designation command may be transmitted to the effect control board 130 before the power-on designation command or the power recovery designation command is transmitted. Further, the setting value designation command may be transmitted at each start of the variable display of the special symbol, or may be transmitted at each start of the jackpot game.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S34, and permits all interrupts in step S35 to control the progress of the game (main control). The timer interrupt of the board 110) is started, and the initial setting process of this time is completed.

That is, from the time the power of the game machine 1 is turned on until the initial setting process is completed, the state is before the start of the game progress control, and after the initial setting process is completed, the game progress control is performed. It will be ready for the game to be played.

As described above, since a plurality of conditions (operations) are set for the setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation, it is not possible to easily change the setting, clear the RWM, or confirm the setting. , It is possible to suppress fraudulent activities and improve the security of the game machine.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is larger than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, which is the most illegal setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events in which acts are likely to occur, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, when the checksum is abnormal (including the case where the backup flag is not saved), the non-recoverable error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game, so that the game machine operates unexpectedly. It is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine without causing trouble to the game store and the player.

Also, if the value in the set value (during game) area is not in the proper range, that is, if the previous power off may have occurred during the setting change, an unrecoverable error occurs even if the checksum is normal. By executing the process and stopping the progress of the game, the game does not proceed in a state where the set value not intended by the game store is set, and the reliability of the game machine is improved. It becomes possible.

Further, during setting change (setting change mode) or setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the state confirmation display 68, the first image display device 70, and the second image display are displayed on the front surface (front surface) of the game machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the device 71, the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, and on the back surface (back surface), the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113. It is possible to recognize that there is. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the game machine 1.

The setting change operation, the RWM clear operation, and the setting confirmation operation may include, as a condition, that the opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening / closing) of the glass frame 4 is in the ON state. The open detection switch 31a is provided on, for example, the game board mounting frame 3. By doing so, since the conditions are increased, fraudulent activities can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

When the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S20, the non-recoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c is set. The initial value "1" may be saved in the value area, and the process may be moved to step S24.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current game state, but after the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are sent, the current game state is sent. The game state specification command indicating the above may be transmitted.

Further, by not determining the presence / absence of the setting changing flag, the unrecoverable error processing may not be performed even if the previous power failure occurs during the setting change.

Further, when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) is calculated, but the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if one of the checksums is abnormal, the checksum may be shifted to the non-recoverable error processing. ..

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S19-1, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the setting changing signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts to output a setting changing signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being changed. The setting changing signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting change, and even after the setting change is completed, the output is continued for 200 ms and then the output is terminated.

In step S19-2, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation indicator 68 is turned on. This makes it possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being changed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

In step S19-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting change designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed.

The "setting change notification" is to display a setting changing screen indicating that the set value is being changed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or to display a frame lighting device 10 or board lighting. The device 74 is fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) while the setting is changed. The voice output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound (“setting is being changed”) indicating that the setting is being changed. As a result, the game clerk grasps that the setting is being changed by checking the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9. It becomes possible.

In step S19-4, the main CPU 110a decrements the set value of the set value (during game) area by -1 and saves it in the set value (changing) area, and in step S19-5, the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Initialize (clear 0) the set value (during game) area.

In step S19-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value in the set value (changing) area is within an appropriate range (here, 0 to 3). If it is determined that the set value in the set value (changing) area is within the appropriate range, the process is moved to step S19-8, and it is determined that the set value in the set value (changing) area is not in the appropriate range. If so, the process is moved to step S19-7.

When it is determined in step S19-6 that the set value in the set value (changing) area is not in the appropriate range, the main CPU 110a sets the initial value "in the set value (changing) area" in step S19-7. Set "0".

In step S19-8, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, the value obtained by adding +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 with reference to the set value in the set value (changing) area. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the set value before the change by checking the information display 113.

In step S19-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the set value update operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a has changed from the OFF state to the ON state. If there is a set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-10, and if there is no set value update operation, the process is transferred to step S19-13.

The main CPU 110a updates the set value in the set value (changing) area by +1 in step S19-10, and performs the set value correction process in step S19-11. Specifically, when the updated set value is "4" that exceeds the appropriate range (here, 0 to 3), the process of correcting the set value to "0" is performed.

In step S19-12, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, the value obtained by adding +1 (here, 1 to 4) is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113 with reference to the set value in the set value (changing) area. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the set value before the confirmation by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S19-13 whether or not the set value determination operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a setting value confirmation operation, the process is moved to step S19-14 assuming that the setting value has been confirmed (the setting change mode is terminated), and if there is no setting value confirmation operation, the setting value is updated. The process is moved to step S19-9 as it may be performed.

In step S19-14, the main CPU 110a adds +1 to the set value of the set value (changing) area and saves it in the set value (during game) area, and in step S19-15, sets the set value (changing) area. Initialize the value (clear 0).

In step S19-16, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the set value on the information display 113, ends the display of the status confirmation display 68 in step S19-17, and ends the current setting change process.

In this way, even if the set value is not in the proper range, the initial value is set as the set value, so that an indefinite value is set as the set value and the game machine is unexpected. It is possible to improve the reliability of the game machine without causing trouble to the game store and the player by performing the operation.

In addition, while the setting is being changed (during the setting change mode), the game clerk is on the front (front surface) of the game machine 1 with a status confirmation display 68, a first image display device 70, a second image display device 71, and frame lighting. It is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, and it is possible to recognize that the setting is being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back surface (back surface). It has become. That is, it is possible to grasp whether or not the setting is being changed from either the front (front surface) or the back surface (back surface) of the game machine 1.

In addition, although the setting value confirmation operation was set to change the setting key switch 112a from the ON state to the OFF state, the RWM clear switch 111a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the dedicated switch may be turned OFF. The state may be changed from the state to the ON state, or the touch sensor 15a may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state by inputting the signal from the touch sensor 15a to the main control board 110. , The detection switch (for example, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, etc.) provided in the specific winning opening (including the starting opening) may be changed from the OFF state to the ON state, or the opening detection switch 31a may be changed from the OFF state. It may be turned on.

In addition, the setting change specification command is sent at the start of the setting change processing, and the power-on specification command is sent after the setting change processing is completed. However, the setting change start specification command is sent instead of the setting change specification command. Then, instead of the power-on designation command, the setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the setting change end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or may be sent after the setting change process is completed.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the RWM clearing process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) other than the set value area of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data (other than the set value) of the game RWM area before clearing the RWM is not inherited. Become.

In step S24-2, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. If another security signal is output from the security signal terminal, the output of the RWM clear signal (security signal) is started after the output period of the output security signal ends.

In step S24-3, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear designation command to the effect control board 130, and ends the current RWM clear process.

The RWM clear specification command is transmitted at the start of the RWM clear process, and the power-on specification command is transmitted after the RWM clear process is completed. However, the RWM clear start specification command is transmitted instead of the RWM clear specification command. Then, instead of the power-on designation command, the RWM clear end designation command may be transmitted. In this case, the RWM clear end specification command may be transmitted at the end of the RWM clear process, or may be transmitted after the end of the RWM clear process.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S28-1, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the setting confirmation signal (security signal). Specifically, the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90 starts to output a setting confirmation signal (security signal) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. The setting confirmation signal (security signal) continues to be output during the setting confirmation, and even after the setting confirmation is completed, the output is continued for 200 ms and then the output is terminated.

In step S28-2, the main CPU 110a displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed on the status confirmation display 68. Specifically, one LED of the status confirmation indicator 68 is turned on. As a result, it becomes possible for the game clerk to know that the setting is being confirmed by checking the status confirmation display 68.

In step S28-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting confirmation designation command to the effect control board 130. As a result, a process for executing the setting confirmation notification for notifying that the setting confirmation is being performed by the effect control board 130 is performed.

The "setting confirmation notification" is to display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the setting is being confirmed on the first image display device 70 or the second image display device 71, or to display the frame lighting device 10 or the panel lighting device 74. Is to be fully lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, white) during the setting confirmation. The voice output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“confirming the set value”) indicating that the setting is being confirmed. As a result, the game clerk grasps that the setting is being confirmed by checking the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the audio output device 9. It becomes possible.

In step S28-4, the main CPU 110a displays the current set value on the information display 113. Specifically, with reference to the set value in the set value (during game) area, a number (1 to 4 in this case) indicating the set value is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. As a result, the game clerk can grasp the current set value by checking the information display 113.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S28-5 whether or not the confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process is moved to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process of step S28-5 is repeated.

In step S28-6, the main CPU 110a ends the display of the set value on the information display 113, ends the display of the status confirmation display 68 in step S28-7, and ends the current setting change process.

The setting confirmation specification command is sent at the start of the setting confirmation process, and the power recovery specification command is sent after the setting confirmation process is completed. However, the setting confirmation start specification command is sent instead of the setting confirmation specification command. Then, instead of the power-on designation command, the setting confirmation end designation command may be sent. In this case, the setting confirmation end specification command may be sent at the end of the setting confirmation process, or may be sent after the setting confirmation process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal are output from the same security signal terminal. By doing so, it is possible to output many types of signals even with a limited number of signal terminals, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the game machine.

Further, from the start of power supply until the game progress control (timer interruption of the main control board 110) is performed (in the state before the start), inputs other than the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a are input. Signal input from the device (out ball detection switch 39a, general winning opening detection switch 43a, gate detection switch 44a, first starting opening detection switch 45a, second starting opening detection switch 47a, second major winning opening detection switch 56a) It is designed not to monitor the presence or absence.

That is, in the pre-start state before the progress control of the game is started, even if the game ball wins in various winning openings (including the starting opening), the winning is invalid and the game ball is not paid out. It has become like. Further, even if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the winning is invalidated and the special symbol changes in the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. The display is not performed, and the big hit game and the small hit game are not executed. Further, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the passage is invalid and the normal symbol display 62 does not display the fluctuation of the normal symbol, so that the auxiliary game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that the game will be performed by the player before the progress control of the game is started.

Further, in the state before the start of the game progress control, even if various errors occur, the error notification is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load by avoiding unnecessary processing in a situation where it is difficult to assume that a fraudulent act will be performed before the progress control of the game is started.

The setting changing signal, the RWM clear signal, the setting confirmation signal, and the unrecoverable error signal may be output from separate output terminals instead of being output from the common security signal terminal.

(Performance display data setting processing of the main control board)
The performance display data setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the performance display data setting process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S850-1, the main CPU 110a displays a display switching time counter saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in order to determine whether or not to switch the performance information displayed on the information display 113. It is determined whether or not the switching value is "0". If the display switching value is "0", the process is moved to step 850-2 assuming that the performance information (normal base value) displayed on the information display 113 is switched, and if it is not the display switching value "0", the process is started. , The process is moved to step S850-6 assuming that the performance information displayed on the information display 113 is not switched. When this process is first executed after the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the value of the display switching time counter is "0", which is the display switching value.

In step S850-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the lighting confirmed flag for determining whether or not the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 has been completed is saved in the information RWM area. If the lighting confirmed flag is saved, the process is moved to step S850-4 assuming that the normal base value is displayed on the information display 113, and if the lighting confirmed flag is not saved, the information is displayed. The process is moved to step S850-3 to confirm the lighting of the device 113. When this process is executed for the first time after the power is turned on to the game machine 1, the lighting confirmed flag is not saved.

In step 850-3, the main CPU 110a displays a lighting confirmation display for lighting all segments (including decimal points) of the four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) constituting the information display 113. Determine the data.

In step S850-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a normal base value (for displaying on the information display 113) according to the data selection counter value from the base storage area provided in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. Specifically, if the data selection counter value is "0", the normal base value saved in the first area of the base storage area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "1", the base storage is stored. The normal base value saved in the second area of the area is acquired, and if the data selection counter value is "2", the normal base value saved in the third area of the base storage area is acquired and the data is selected. If the counter value is "3", the normal base value saved in the fourth area of the base storage area is acquired.

In step S850-5, the main CPU 110a displays information based on the interval counter value, the number of normal medium outs indicated by the normal medium out number counter, and the acquired normal base value with reference to a display data determination table (not shown). The display data of the normal base value to be displayed on the device 113 is determined.

The main CPU 110a sets the determined display data in step S850-6 in the output data area of the information RWM area as the display information of the information display 113. As a result, the display data set in the output data area of the information RWM area is referred to in the output control process of step S880 described above, and the normal base value (performance information) corresponding to the display data is displayed on the information display 113. Will be done. The display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described later.

In step S850-7, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned display switching time counter, and in step S850-8, determines whether or not the display switching time counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, it is assumed that the time for switching the display of the information display 113 has not elapsed, and the process is moved to step S850-15. If it is larger than the upper limit value, the information display 113 is displayed. Assuming that the time for switching the displayed performance information has elapsed, the display switching time counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S850-9.

In step S850-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the above-mentioned lighting confirmed flag is present in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If there is a lighting confirmed flag, the process is moved to step S850-12, and if there is no lighting confirmed flag, the lighting confirmed flag is saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S850-11. ..

In step S850-12, the main CPU 110a adds 1 to the above-mentioned data selection counter, and in step S85-13, determines whether or not the data selection counter is larger than the upper limit value (for example, 3). If it is not larger than the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S850-15, and if it is larger than the upper limit value, the data selection counter is cleared (initialized) to 0 in step S850-14.

In step S850-15, the main CPU 110a restores the register saved in the information RWM area of the main RAM 110c by the game ball counting process described above, and in step S850-16, the game ball counting process described above restores the register for information of the main RAM 110c. The game stack pointer saved in the RWM area is returned, and the performance display data setting process this time is completed.

In this way, after the power of the game machine 1 is turned on and before the performance information (normal base value) is displayed, all the segments of the four 7-segment displays of the information display 113 are lit (lighting confirmation is performed). Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether the information display 113 is out of order, which segment is out of order, and the like.

In addition, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections consisting of the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order, so that the latest 4 is displayed. Performance information (usually base value) in one game section can be compared, and it is possible to confirm the actual performance of the game machine and grasp the possibility of fraudulent activity.

(Display information of information display in each game section)
Next, the display information of the information display 113 in each game section will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the table of display information of FIG. 39, the section counter value (type of game section), the number of normal outs, the data selection counter value, and the display content of the information display 113 are associated with each other.

The identification information displayed on the identification segment of the information display 113 is "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the current game section, and "bL.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the previous game section. There are "b1.", "B2." Indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section two times before, and "b3.", Which indicates that it is the normal base value of the game section three times before.

The numerical information displayed on the numerical segment of the information display 113 is "---" indicating that there is no calculated normal base value, the normal base value is "0", or the number of normal medium outs is "0". "00" indicating that, "01" to "99" indicating that the number of outs in normal is "1" or more and the normal base value is "1" to "99", and the normal base value are There is "99." indicating that it is "100" or more. Normally, when the base value is less than "10", the tens digit of the numerical information is always "0" and displayed in two digits.

The display mode of the numerical information displayed in the numerical segment does not change (lights up) regardless of the game section or the number of outs during normal operation, but the identification information displayed in the identification segment is the game section or The display mode changes (blinks or lights up) depending on the number of outs during normal times (whether or not there is a calculated normal base value or whether or not the calculated normal base value is credible).

Specifically, in the first to fourth game sections, when the identification information of the game section without the calculated normal base value is displayed, the identification information is displayed blinking. Further, in the game section after the second game section, when the identification information (“bL.”) Of the current game section is displayed, the calculated normal base value has a low credibility period (the number of outs during normal use is high). If it is 0 to 5999), the identification information will be displayed blinking. In other cases, the identification information is lit and displayed.

Here, to show an example of the display of the information display 113, the interval counter value is "1", the number of normal outs is in the range of 0 to 5999, and the data selection counter value is "0". When the normal base value stored in the first area of the base storage area is "35", "bL." Is blinking and displayed in the identification segment of the information display 113, and "35" is displayed in the numerical segment. Will be lit and displayed.

In this way, when the normal base value is "99" or less, the performance information of "00" to "99" that does not use the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display is displayed in the numerical segment, while the normal base value is displayed. When the value is "100" or more, the performance information using the decimal point DP of the 7-segment display "99." is displayed in the numerical segment, so it is easy to grasp that it is an abnormal normal base value. ..

In addition, when the base value is usually less than "10", "0" is always displayed in the tens digit of the numerical segment and displayed in two digits (for example, "01"), so 2 as a numerical segment. It is possible to make an easy-to-understand display by effectively using the two 7-segment displays.

Further, when the normal base value of the current game section is displayed, and the number of normal outs in the current game section is 0 to 5999, which is not sufficient for calculating the normal base value. Since the identification information "bL." Displayed in the identification segment is blinking and displayed, it becomes easy to grasp that the normally displayed base value is low credibility information.

In addition, if there is no calculated normal base value, a non-numerical "---" is displayed in the numerical segment, so the normal base value is calculated in the game section corresponding to the identification information displayed in the identification segment. It becomes easier to understand that it is not.

It should be noted that, instead of executing the game ball counting process, the normal base value calculation process, and the performance display data setting process as an information program, one or two of them are executed as a game program (for example, a game ball). The counting process is executed in the input control process that monitors the presence or absence of signal input from various switches), while the rest may be executed as an information program.

Further, the process of outputting the display data for displaying the performance information on the information display 113 may be executed by the performance program instead of being executed by the output control process which is the game program.

Further, the out ball detection switch 39a comprises a game ball that has won a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, and a second major winning opening 56, and a game ball that has flowed into the out opening 39. Instead of detecting the out ball, only the game ball that has flowed into the out port may be detected by the out ball detection switch 39a. In that case, every time the game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch 39a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the second major winning opening detection switch 56a. It is advisable to add the number of outs (total number of outs, normal number of outs) by one.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources after the setting is changed will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated after changing the settings.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting port opening / closing member 48 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57) are stopped. There is.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined mode is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67 , The status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the setting change notification described above is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are terminated, the initial operation of various drive sources is started, and the right end of the information display 113 is displayed. The set value displayed on the 7-segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources (display of the initial operation screen, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" Please output) is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. To be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. When the predetermined period elapses, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (5 seconds in this case) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current state). The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections including the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after confirming the settings)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is confirmed will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated after the setting is confirmed.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting port opening / closing member 48 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57) are stopped. There is.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined mode is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67 , The status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, if the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is ON) is performed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before the start. At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and the setting confirmation notification described above is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

When the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed at the timing of T2, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are terminated, the initial operations of various drive sources are started, and the 7 at the right end of the information display 113 is started. The set value displayed on the segment display 113d is erased and hidden. At this time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 ends, and the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources (display of the initial operation screen, initial operation confirmation voice "Check the operation of the solenoid" Please output) is started.

The specific examples from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10 are the same as the specific examples from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10 in the specific example when the various drive sources are initially operated after the setting change shown in FIG. 40. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, second large winning opening opening / closing) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Since various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 57) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (game board 5 only, board surface) is operated. Drive controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory (including the case of only the unit 500) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500). It is possible to easily check the operation of the source.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main except for the state confirmation indicator 68. Information display 69 (1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator Since 65, the round number indicator 66, and the right-handed indicator 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and various drive sources. It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the operator (worker, game clerk) who confirms the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to confirm the operation of various drive sources, and to appropriately confirm the operation. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the movable body that affects the result of the game is operated after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) is finished. Since the initial operation of various drive sources for operation is performed, it is not necessary to check the operation of various drive sources while changing the settings (confirmation of settings), and the operation check should be performed appropriately. Is possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, after the operation standby time has passed after the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode) is completed, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is started. Therefore, it is possible to allow time from the completion of the setting change (setting confirmation) to the operation confirmation of various drive sources, and the operation confirmation can be performed appropriately.

Further, according to the present embodiment, it does not matter whether the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is after the end of the setting change mode or after the end of the setting confirmation mode. However, since the same initial operation notification is performed, the control of the initial operation notification can be simplified, and the development cost of the game machine 1 can be reduced (development period shortened, etc.). It will be possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the light, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when various drive sources for operating the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the second special winning opening is open even though it is open. Since no signal is output, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being given to the main control board 110, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the game machine is not displayed on the information display 113 from the power-on of the game machine to the start of the progress control of the game (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information (normal base value) of the game machine is displayed (display of the performance information is permitted) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience on the amusement store side can be ensured.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the set value and the performance information of the game machine are not displayed on the information display 113 during the initial operation of the various drive sources, so that the initial operation of the various drive sources can be confirmed. On the other hand, it is possible to concentrate the consciousness of the employees of the amusement store, and it is possible to accurately judge the failure of various drive sources.

In the present embodiment, after the progress control of the game is started, all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d of the information display 113 are turned on to confirm the lighting. After the setting confirmation mode, the lighting confirmation may not be performed.

(Operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 42, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, assistance in the normal game state) of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 are assisted. The motions in the game motion and the auxiliary game motion in the time-saving gaming state) are compared.

The number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven is the same during the auxiliary game operation and the initial operation during the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

The one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is longer in the initial operation than in the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, the total driving time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is shorter in the initial operation than in the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b.

The total driving time of the second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b is shorter in the initial operation than in the jackpot game operation. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b.

It should be noted that at least one of the number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and one drive time. , The value may be the same as or almost the same (similar) as the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is the number of drives during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and one drive time. , The value may be smaller than the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set to the number of times during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and one drive time. , The value may be the same as or almost the same (similar) as the total drive time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set to the number of times during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and one drive time. , The value may be larger than the total drive time. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is set to the number of times during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and one drive time. , It may be a value smaller than the total drive time. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b.

In addition, at least one of the number of times the second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is the total drive time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). It may be the same value as the drive time or a value almost the same (similar). In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, at least one of the number of times the second prize opening opening / closing solenoid 57b is driven during the initial operation, one drive time, and the total drive time is larger than the one drive time and the total drive time during the jackpot game operation. It may be a value. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

(First modification)
Hereinafter, a first modification of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 50. In the first modification, the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again, and the drive source initial operation process is performed during the setting change process, the setting confirmation process, and the RWM clear process. Since it is different from the first embodiment, only the difference from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the initial setting processing of the main control board of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 34 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process (game program) in step S19. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, the process for changing (updating) the set value (probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination) at the stage of the advantage of the game, and the above-mentioned process. Performs the drive source initial operation processing (game program). The details of the setting change process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S24.

The main CPU 110a performs the RWM clearing process (game program) in step S24. Specifically, the process for initializing the control state of the game (initializing the area other than the set value area of the RWM area for the game) based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 111a, and the drive source initial operation process described above. (Game program) is performed, and the process is transferred to step S26. The details of the RWM clearing process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process (game program) in step S28. Specifically, the process for displaying the set value saved in the set value (during game) area of the game RWM area on the information display 113 and the above-mentioned drive source initial operation process are performed. The details of the setting confirmation process will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S30.

(Main control board setting change processing)
The setting change process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a setting change process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the setting change processing of the main control board of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 35 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

The main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program) in steps S19-12a. Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided on the board unit 500 and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are provided. Performs processing for initial operation until the setting change mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting change mode will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is moved to step S19-13.

In steps S19-17a, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the setting change mode ends due to the setting value confirmation operation, and ends the current setting change process.

(RWM clear processing of main control board)
The RWM clearing process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the RWM clearing process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S24-1, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board is subjected to the process for performing the RWM clear preparation notification.

The "RWM clear preparation notification" is to display a clear preparation screen for the image display device to recognize that the RWM clear preparation is being prepared, or to notify the voice output device 9 that "Please press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output audio over a predetermined period of time.

In step S24-2, the main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided on the board unit 500 and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are provided. The process for initial operation is performed until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S24-3 whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the process is moved to step S24-4 assuming that the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM clear is performed, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process proceeds to step S24-2. Move the process.

In step S24-4, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) a region other than the set value region of the game RWM region of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data of the game RWM area before clearing the RWM is not inherited.

In step S24-5, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S24-6, the main CPU 110a transmits an RWM clear designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized to the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to the process for terminating the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification.

In step S24-7, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the RWM clear preparation mode ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, and ends the current RWM clear process.

(Main control board setting confirmation process)
The setting confirmation process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the setting confirmation process of the main control board of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 37 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

In step S28-4a, the main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided on the board unit 500 and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are provided. Performs processing for initial operation until the setting confirmation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the setting confirmation mode will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S28-5.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S28-5 whether or not the confirmation end operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 112a has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If there is a confirmation end operation, the process is transferred to step S28-6, and if there is no confirmation end operation, the process is transferred to step S28-4a.

In step S28-7a, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources as the setting confirmation mode ends due to the confirmation end operation, and ends the current setting confirmation process.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated while changing settings)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an example of effect when various drive sources are initially operated while the setting is changed.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting port opening / closing member 48 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57) are stopped. There is.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined mode is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67 , The status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, when the setting change operation (setting key switch 112a is ON, RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the setting change mode is started on the main control board 110. It becomes the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting change notification (display of the setting changing screen, setting changing voice "setting is being changed" and initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources and that the setting is being changed "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the operating time of various drive sources (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, various drives are performed from the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The source is repeatedly activated and stopped.

At the timing of T10, if the set value confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting change mode and the setting change notification are sent. Upon termination, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources is terminated, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113. finish. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the state before the start to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. To be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a lapse of a predetermined period.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (5 seconds in this case) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections including the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the preparation for clearing the RWM will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting port opening / closing member 48 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57) are stopped. There is.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined mode is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67 , The status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that RWM clearing is being prepared is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the RWM clear preparation is being prepared and the RWM clear preparation notification to prompt the operation check of various drive sources (display of the clear preparation screen, the notification sound of "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and the operation of the solenoid are confirmed. "Please do" (alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice) is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed in a state where the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation are performed. When the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to the possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. To be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a lapse of a predetermined period.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (5 seconds in this case) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections including the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the setting confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated during setting confirmation.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting port opening / closing member 48 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57) are stopped. There is.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined mode is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67 , The status confirmation display 68), the first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

At the timing of T1, if the setting confirmation operation (setting key switch 112a is ON) is performed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before the start.

At this time, a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the setting confirmation notification (display of the setting confirmation screen, setting confirmation voice "setting is being confirmed" and the initial operation confirmation voice "solenoid operation" is also being performed to prompt the operation confirmation of various drive sources. "Please check" (alternate output) is started. Further, the current set value (here, "6") is displayed on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the confirmation end operation (setting key switch 112a is OFF) is performed while the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the setting confirmation mode and the setting confirmation notification are completed. At the same time, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of the various drive sources is completed, and the display of the set value on the 7-segment display 113d at the right end of the information display 113 is also completed. To do. Then, the main control board 110 shifts from the state before the start to the game-enabled state in which the progress control of the game is performed.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power recovery notification is sent. To be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a lapse of a predetermined period.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (5 seconds in this case) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections including the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present modification, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, second large winning opening opening / closing) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Since various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 57) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (game board 5 only, board surface) is operated. Drive controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory (including the case of only the unit 500) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500). It is possible to easily check the operation of the source.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main except for the state confirmation indicator 68. Information display 69 (1st special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator Since 65, the round number indicator 66, and the right-handed indicator 67) are in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and various drive sources. It is possible to concentrate on checking the operation of.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the setting is being changed and the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is urged. Because the setting change notification for this purpose (setting confirmation is being performed and setting confirmation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources) is performed, it is a game that it is the timing to confirm the operation of various drive sources. It is possible to notify the worker (worker, game clerk) who confirms the operation of the machine 1 so that the operation can be confirmed appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, since various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated in the setting change mode (setting confirmation mode), the progress control of the game is controlled. It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the pre-start state before the start of the game, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when the set value confirmation operation (confirmation end operation) is performed and the pre-start state ends, the various drive sources are immediately activated even before the operation time of the various drive sources has elapsed. Is designed to end, so that the initial operation of various drive sources is not performed in the game-enabled state, and the inconvenience of being confused with the operation of various drive sources according to the progress of the game is avoided. Is possible.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the light, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the second special winning opening is open even though it is open. Since no signal is output, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being given to the main control board 110, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the game machine is not displayed on the information display 113 from the power-on of the game machine to the start of the progress control of the game (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the game machine is displayed (display of the performance information is allowed) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information is not displayed on the 7-segment displays 113a to 113c other than the 7-segment display 113d on which the current setting value is displayed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the current set value can be appropriately notified, and the convenience on the amusement store side can be ensured.

In this modified example, in the setting change notification in the setting change mode, the setting changing screen in which the character "setting changing" is displayed is displayed, but in addition to the character "setting changing" Alternatively, a setting changing screen may be displayed in which the characters "During the initial operation of the drive source" or "Please check the operation of the solenoid" are displayed to prompt the visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources.

(Operation comparison table)
Using FIG. 50, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, assistance in the normal game state) of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 are assisted. The motions in the game motion and the auxiliary game motion in the time-saving gaming state) are compared.

The one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is longer in the initial operation than in the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the auxiliary game operation in the normal game state can be performed, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

It should be noted that the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. .. By doing so, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value smaller than the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the normal game state. By doing so, it is possible to shorten the confirmation time at the time of initial operation of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b.

Further, the one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to the same value or substantially the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. .. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, one drive time of the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b during the initial operation may be set to a value larger than one drive time during the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b can perform the auxiliary game operation during the time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation. Become.

Further, even if the one drive time of the second large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b during the initial operation is set to the same value or almost the same (similar) value as the one drive time during the jackpot game operation (4R or 10R). Good. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

Further, the one drive time of the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b at the time of the initial operation may be set to a value larger than the one drive time at the time of the big hit game operation. In this way, it is possible to confirm at the time of the initial operation whether or not the second special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b can perform the big hit game operation, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of the operation confirmation.

(Second modification)
Hereinafter, a second modification of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 52. In the second modification, the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, the status confirmation indicator 68 is not provided, and the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again. Since this is different from the first embodiment, only the differences from the first embodiment will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S11, performs initial CPU settings such as internal register settings in step S12, and performs start-up waiting processing for other control boards in step S13. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the effect control board 130 to start up so that the command is not missed from the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S14, and transmits a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S15. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs a process for permitting the launching device 26 to launch the game ball.

The main CPU 110a determines in step S16 whether or not the RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S23 as a transition to the RWM clear preparation mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process is transferred to step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a backup flag indicating that the power is restored is saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag is saved, the process is moved to step S18 as if the power was restored, and if the backup flag is not saved, the process is moved to step S23 as if the power was turned on for the first time.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S19, determines whether or not the checksum is normal. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c and the checksum calculated in step S18 match. If the checksum is normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the process is moved to step S20, and if the checksum is not normal (the data in the RWM area is normal), the RWM clear preparation mode The process is transferred to step S23 as a transition to step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a clears (clears 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and sets the RWM area at the time of power restoration. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (recovered) to the state before the power is turned off, so that the game can be restarted from the state before the power is turned off.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a power restoration designation command indicating that the control state of the game has been restored and the game state before the occurrence of the power failure to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to a process for executing a power restoration notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (special symbol storage designation command, ordinary symbol storage designation command, etc., which will be described later) to the effect control board 130. As a result, the effect control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special figures, and a process for displaying the variable image 51 (described later) and the reserved image 52 (described later) on the image display device is performed. Become. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S30.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a transmits the RWM clear preparation designation command to the effect control board 130, and shifts to the RWM clear preparation mode. As a result, the effect control board 130 is subjected to the process for performing the RWM clear preparation notification.

The "RWM clear preparation notification" is to display a clear preparation screen for the image display device to recognize that the RWM clear preparation is being prepared, or to notify the voice output device 9 that "Please press the RWM clear switch again". It is to output audio over a predetermined period of time.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the process is moved to step S25 assuming that the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM clear is performed, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process of step S24 is repeated. ..

In step S25, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data of the game RWM area before clearing the RWM is not inherited.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs an output process of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a performs a drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, processing is performed to initially operate various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided on the board unit 500. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S30. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S31, allows all interrupts to start game progress control. , End the initial setting process this time.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing RWM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting port opening / closing member 48 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57) are stopped. There is.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined mode is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67 ), The first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done. At this time, the above-mentioned RWM clear preparation notification is started.

When the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed at the timing of T2, the RWM clear preparation mode ends and the initial operation of various drive sources is started. At this time, the initial operation notification (display of the initial operation screen, output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid") for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T3, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T4, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T5, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T6, the various drive sources When the operating time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T7, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T8, the various drive sources When the operating time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T9, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. To be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a lapse of a predetermined period.

At the timing of T10, when the confirmation time (5 seconds in this case) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current state). The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections including the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present modification, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, second large winning opening opening / closing) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Since various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 57) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (game board 5 only, board surface) is operated. Drive controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory (including the case of only the unit 500) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500). It is possible to easily check the operation of the source.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main information display 69 (first). Special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66 Since the right-handed display 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. Is possible.

Further, according to the present modification, when various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and have them check the operation appropriately. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, various types for operating a movable body that affects the result of the game after the end of the RWM clear preparation mode even in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Since the drive source is initially operated, it is not necessary to check the operation of various drive sources while performing the RWM clear approval operation, and it is possible to appropriately check the operation.

Further, according to this modification, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is started after the operation standby time has passed after the RWM clear preparation mode is completed. Therefore, it is possible to have a time margin from the completion of the RWM clear approval operation to the operation check of various drive sources, and the operation check can be performed appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the light, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the second special winning opening is open even though it is open. Since no signal is output, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being given to the main control board 110, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the game machine is not displayed on the information display 113 from the power-on of the game machine to the start of the progress control of the game (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the game machine is displayed (display of the performance information is allowed) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, normal game state) of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 in the second modification The operation comparison in the auxiliary game operation and the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 48, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

(Third modification example)
Hereinafter, a third modification of the initial operation of various drive sources will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 54. The third modification is different from the first embodiment in that the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed and that the RWM clear process continues until the RWM clear switch 111a is operated again, which is different from the RWM. This is a second modification in that the drive source initial operation processing is performed during the clear preparation mode.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the third modification will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the initial setting processing of the main control board in the second modification shown in FIG. 51 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided on the board unit 500 and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are provided. The process for initial operation is performed until the RWM clear preparation mode ends. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources in the RWM clear preparation mode will be described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to step S25.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RWM clear approval operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear approval operation, the process is transferred to step S26 assuming that the RWM clear preparation mode is terminated and the RWM clear is performed, and if there is no RWM clear approval operation, the process is transferred to step S24.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a performs a process for stopping the initial operation of various drive sources, and in step S27, initializes (clears 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data of the game RWM area before clearing the RWM is not inherited.

In step S28, the main CPU 110a performs output processing of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S29, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S30. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM)
A specific example of the initial operation of various drive sources during the preparation for clearing the RWM will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated during preparation for clearing RWM.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting port opening / closing member 48 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57) are stopped. There is.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined mode is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67 ), The first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

When the RWM clear operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear preparation mode is started on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the start before it is done.

At this time, operation (drive source = ON) is started as an initial operation of various drive sources. In addition, the RWM clear preparation is being prepared and the RWM clear preparation notification to prompt the operation check of various drive sources (display of the clear preparation screen, the notification sound of "Please press the RWM clear switch again" and the operation of the solenoid are confirmed. "Please do" (alternate output of the initial operation confirmation voice) is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses from the start of operation of the various drive sources, the operation of the various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF), and thereafter, the timing of T3 to the timing of T10. The operation and stop of various drive sources are repeated until.

At the timing of T10, if the RWM clear approval operation (RWM clear switch 111a is ON) is performed in a state where the operating time of various drive sources started from the timing of T9 has not elapsed, the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation mode and the RWM clear preparation are performed. When the notification ends, the operation of various drive sources is immediately stopped (drive source = OFF), the initial operation of various drive sources ends, and the main control board 110 controls the progress of the game from the state before the start. Move to the possible state.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. To be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a lapse of a predetermined period.

At the timing of T11, when the confirmation time (5 seconds in this case) elapses from the start of the lighting confirmation of the information display 113, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) is completed. The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections including the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present modification, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, second large winning opening opening / closing) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Since various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 57) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (game board 5 only, board surface) is operated. Drive controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory (including the case of only the unit 500) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500). It is possible to easily check the operation of the source.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main information display 69 (first). Special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66 Since the right-handed display 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. Is possible.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, it is confirmed that the RWM clear is being prepared and the operation of the various drive sources is confirmed. Since the RWM clear preparation notification for prompting is provided, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources. It is possible to check the operation appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, since various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game are initially operated in the RWM clear preparation mode, the progress control of the game is started. It is not necessary to create a plurality of states in the state before the start, and it is possible to reduce the development cost of the game machine 1 (shorten the development period, etc.).

Further, according to this modification, when the pre-start state ends due to the RWM clear approval operation, the operation of the various drive sources is immediately terminated even before the operating time of the various drive sources has elapsed. Therefore, the initial operation of the various drive sources is not performed in the game-enabled state, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of being confused with the operation of the various drive sources according to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the light, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the second special winning opening is open even though it is open. Since no signal is output, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being given to the main control board 110, and an information collecting device such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 can be used. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the game machine is not displayed on the information display 113 from the power-on of the game machine to the start of the progress control of the game (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the game machine is displayed (display of the performance information is allowed) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In this modified example, in the RWM clear preparation notification in the RWM clear preparation mode, the clear preparation screen in which the characters "RWM clear preparation in preparation" is displayed is displayed, but "RWM clear preparation in preparation" is displayed. In addition to the characters, the clear preparation screen that prompts the visual confirmation of the initial operation of various drive sources with the characters "During initial operation of drive source" or "Please check the operation of the solenoid" is displayed. Good.

In addition, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, normal game state) of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 in the third modification The operation comparison in the auxiliary game operation and the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 50, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

(Fourth modification)
Hereinafter, the fourth modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 56. The fourth modification is different from the first embodiment in that the setting change function and the setting confirmation function are not installed, and the RWM clear is performed without going through the RWM clear preparation mode, which is different from the second modification. Since they are different, only the differences from the first embodiment and the second modification will be described here.

(Initial setting process of main control board)
The initial setting process (game program) of the main control board 110 in the fourth modification will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an initial setting process of the main control board 110.
Here, the parts that match the initial setting processing of the main control board in the second modification shown in FIG. 51 are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted, and only the periphery of the different parts will be described.

In step S23, the main CPU 110a initializes (clears 0) the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the progress state of the game is initialized to the initial state (the state at the time of shipment of the game machine 1), and the data of the game RWM area before clearing the RWM is not inherited.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs an output process of the RWM clear signal (security signal). Specifically, processing is performed to output an RWM clear signal (security signal) indicating that the RWM has been cleared from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90.

In step S25, the main CPU 110a executes the drive source initial operation process (game program). Specifically, various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided on the board unit 500 and operated by the main control board 110 according to the progress of the game are provided. Performs processing for initial operation over a predetermined period. The details of the initial operation of various drive sources will be described later.

In step S26, the main CPU 110a issues a power-on designation command indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a non-time-saving game state as a normal game state). It is transmitted to the substrate 130 and the process is transferred to step S30. As a result, the effect control board 130 performs a process for executing the power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

(Specific example when various drive sources are initially operated after clearing RWM)
A specific example of the case where various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a timing chart and an production example when various drive sources are initially operated after the RWM is cleared.

First, at the timing of T0, the power of the game machine 1 is turned off. At this time, a movable body that affects the result of the game, such as changing whether or not the game ball enters the predetermined area (second starting port 47, second large winning opening 56) (ball entry difficulty). Various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the second starting port opening / closing member 48 and the second winning opening opening / closing member 57) are stopped. There is.

Further, during the round game, the large winning opening LED that causes the large winning opening (second large winning opening 56) to emit light in a predetermined mode is turned off, and the main information display 69 (first special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66, right-handed indicator 67 ), The first image display device 70, and the information display 113 are in a non-display (non-operating, turning off, erasing) state.

If the RWM clear operation (the RWM clear switch 111a is turned ON) is performed when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, the RWM clear is performed on the main control board 110 and the progress control of the game is started. It becomes the state before the previous start. At this time, the initial operation notification (display of the initial operation screen, output of the initial operation confirmation voice of "Please confirm the operation of the solenoid") for prompting the operation confirmation of various drive sources is started.

At the timing of T2, when the operation standby time (7 seconds in this case) elapses after the initial operation notification is started, the first operation of various drive sources (drive source = ON) is started, and at the timing of T3, various types are started. When the operation time of the drive source (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T4, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the second operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T5, the various drive sources When the operating time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T6, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the third operation of the various drive sources is started, and at the timing of T7, the various drive sources When the operating time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses, the operation of various drive sources is stopped (drive source = OFF).

At the timing of T8, when the stop time (0.512 seconds in this case) elapses after the operation of the various drive sources is stopped, the initial operation and the initial operation notification of the various drive sources are completed, and the main control board 110 is before the start. The state shifts to a game-enabled state in which the progress of the game is controlled.

At this time, various displays (display of special symbol, display of normal symbol, display of number of reserved special figures, display of number of reserved symbols, etc.) on the main information display 69 are started, and the above-mentioned power-on notification is sent. To be started. In addition, the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73b) controlled by the effect control board 130 is started, and all the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d are started in the information display 113. Is fully lit and lighting confirmation is started. The initial operation of the movable effect device 73 ends after a lapse of a predetermined period.

At the timing of T9, when the confirmation time (5 seconds in this case) elapses after the lighting confirmation of the information display 113 starts, all the lighting of the 7-segment displays 113a to 113d is completed and the performance information (here, the current one) The display of the normal base value of the game section) is started. After that, every time the display switching time (5 seconds) elapses, the performance information (normal base value) of the four game sections including the current game section and the past three game sections is displayed in order.

As described above, according to the present modification, the movable body (second start opening opening / closing member 48, second large winning opening opening / closing) that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. Since various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) for operating the member 57) are initially operated, the game machine 1 (game board 5 only, board surface) is operated. Drive controlled by the main control means that controls the progress of the game at the time of shipment from the factory (including the case of only the unit 500) or at the time of replacement at the game store (including replacement of only the game board 5 and only the board unit 500). It is possible to easily check the operation of the source.

Further, according to this modification, when various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated (during the state before the start), the main information display 69 (first). Special symbol display 60, 2nd special symbol display 61, normal symbol display 62, 1st special symbol hold indicator 63, 2nd special symbol hold indicator 64, normal symbol hold indicator 65, round number indicator 66 Since the right-handed display 67) is in a non-display (non-operating) state, it is possible to prevent an extra processing load from being applied to the main control board 110, and to concentrate on checking the operation of various drive sources. Is possible.

Further, according to the present modification, when various drive sources for operating the movable body that affect the result of the game are initially operated, the initial operation notification for prompting the operation confirmation of the various drive sources is performed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the workers (workers, game clerk) who check the operation of the game machine 1 that it is time to check the operation of various drive sources, and have them check the operation appropriately. It becomes possible.

Further, according to this modification, the operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game is started after the operation standby time has passed after the RWM clear operation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to have a time margin from the completion of the RWM clearing operation to the operation check of various drive sources, and the operation check can be performed appropriately.

Further, according to this modification, when the various drive sources for operating the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the large winning opening LED is left off, so that the large winning opening LED is turned off. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to confirm the operation of the second large winning opening opening / closing member 57 due to the light from the light, and it is possible to appropriately confirm the operation.

Further, according to this modification, the progress control of the game is performed by performing the initial operation of various drive sources for operating the movable body that affects the result of the game in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is performed. Since the initial operation of the movable effect device 73 that does not affect the result of the game is performed in the playable state to be performed, two types of initial operations can be confirmed in order, and the operation is appropriately confirmed. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the present modification, when various drive sources for operating the second special winning opening opening / closing member 57 are initially operated, the above-mentioned is described even though the second special winning opening is open. Since the signal during opening is not output, it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110, and information collection such as a hall computer that collects information output from the game machine 1 is possible. It is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the device collecting information that does not correspond to the progress of the game.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the game machine is not displayed on the information display 113 from the power-on of the game machine to the start of the progress control of the game (the display of the performance information is displayed). Since it is regulated), it is possible not to give an extra processing load to the main control board 110.

Further, according to this modification, the performance information (normal base value) of the game machine is displayed (display of the performance information is allowed) after the progress control of the game is started. It is possible to confirm whether or not the progress control of the game has been started, and to inform that the performance information is related to the game.

In addition, various operation timings (initial operation, jackpot game operation, normal game state) of various drive sources (second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, second winning opening opening / closing solenoid 57b) provided in the board unit 500 in the fourth modification The operation comparison in the auxiliary game operation and the auxiliary game operation in the time-saving game state) is the same as the operation comparison table shown in FIG. 42, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

In the first embodiment (variation example), it is possible to launch the game ball by transmitting the launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started. However, by transmitting a launch permission designation command to the payout control board 120 when the progress control of the game is started, the game ball may be launched after the game becomes available.

Further, in the first embodiment (variation example), since the payout control board 120 can perform payout control even in the state before the start before the progress control of the game is started, the game machine 1 can be used. Although it is possible to pay out game balls (ball lending) based on a payout request from the ball lending machines installed side by side, the ball lending machine will start the game progress control and become playable. It may be possible to pay out the game ball (ball lending) based on the payout request.

Further, in the first embodiment (variation example), since the backup power is not supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c), the payout control board 120 (payout) when the power to the game machine 1 is turned on. Although the unpaid payout ball number data does not remain in the RAM 121c), the backup power supply may be supplied to the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c). In this case, the power supply to the game machine 1 is supplied. If the unpaid payout ball number data remains on the payout control board 120 (payout RAM 121c) when it is turned ON, this unpaid payout is performed even in the pre-start state before the game progress control is started. It may be possible to pay out game balls based on the number of payout ball data.

Further, although the main information display 69 is provided outside the game area 5a in the first embodiment (variation example), the main information display 69 may be provided inside the game area 5.

Further, in the first embodiment (variation example), a prize ball (prize value) is given based on the establishment of the grant condition (winning of the game ball to the winning opening, the starting opening, and the large winning opening). However, the player's ball may be managed as data, and the prize ball data may be added (added to the ball data).

[Variable production pattern table]
57 and 58 are diagrams showing a setting example of the variation effect pattern table used in the variation effect pattern selection (S2813) in the effect selection process of FIG. 28 (b). Note that FIG. 57 shows a variation effect pattern table for big hits in the low-probability time-saving no-game state, and FIG. 58 shows a variation effect pattern table for small hits and misses in the low-probability time-saving no-game state.

A plurality of variable effect patterns are set in the variable effect pattern table for jackpot shown in FIG. 57. For the variation patterns "PA1" to "PA6", "PB1" to "PB14", and "PC1 to PC2" set using FIG. 21 above, the variation effect patterns "EA1" to "EA6", ""EB1" to "EB14" and "EC1 to EC2" are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis.
Further, in the variation effect pattern table for small hits and misses shown in FIG. 58, a plurality of variation effect patterns are set. The variation effect patterns "ES1 to ES2" and "ER1" to "ER10" are one-to-one with respect to the variation patterns "PD1 to PD2" and "PR1" to "PR10" set using FIG. 21 above. It is associated.

Here, the variable effect is an effect of notifying the determination result (that is, whether or not a big hit) of the special symbol lottery by displaying the decorative symbol in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
Further, in the illustrated variation effect pattern, "pseudo continuous number of times", "normal", "SP reach", and "SPSP reach" are set. In addition, "-" in each column of the illustrated table indicates that the corresponding effect is not executed.

Here, the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is the number of times of the pseudo-continuous production (pseudo-ream). This pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in the variable display of one variation of the special symbol. In the pseudo continuous effect, the effect control unit 300 changes the decorative symbol before the reach state, temporarily stops the decorative symbol, and then starts the variable display of the decorative symbol again. In other words, in the pseudo-continuous production, after the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the temporary stop and re-variation of the decorative symbol are repeated for the set pseudo-continuous number of times, and then the fixed stop is performed to obtain one variation of the special symbol. Finish the variable display.
Here, the temporary stop is a pseudo-stop state in which the decorative symbol seems to be stopped at first glance, but the symbol is actually slightly swaying. In other words, the temporary stop of the decorative symbol is treated as if the fluctuation is continuing in terms of game control. The temporary stop can be, for example, a state in which the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol 41 becomes "0", the decorative symbol 41 is stopped and displayed, and for example, a slight shaking or expansion / contraction is performed.
Further, the fixed stop of the decorative symbol means a state in which the fixed symbol is fixed as a stopped symbol in the variation display for one variation of the special symbol. The temporary stop of the decorative symbol may include displaying a complete stop display for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.
In the illustrated example, the "pseudo-continuous number" is set between "-", "1", "2", "3", that is, 0 to 3 times. In addition, the number of pseudo-consecutive times is set in association with the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. That is, the higher the number of pseudo-consecutive times, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot.

"Normal" indicates the type of reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "N1", "N2", "N3", and "N4" is executed as the type of reach effect.
"SP reach" indicates the type of SP reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "SP1", "SP2", "SP3", and "SP4" is executed as the type of SP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SP1", "SP2", "SP3", and "SP4", the larger the number, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot.

“SPSP reach” indicates the type of SPSP reach effect. In the illustrated example, any one of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3" is executed as the type of SPSP reach effect. Further, in the order of "SPSP1", "SPSP2", and "SPSP3", the larger the number, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot.

By the way, the effect control unit 300 determines the variation effect pattern based on the table shown in FIG. 57. Specifically, the effect control unit 300 selects a variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern set in the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 13) based on the table shown in FIG. 57.
For example, in FIG. 57, when the "big hit symbol" is "high probability symbol A" and the variation pattern is "PB1", "EB1" is selected as the variation effect pattern. Then, in this variable effect pattern "EB1", the "pseudo-continuous number of times" is "1", that is, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once. Further, "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach".

〔image〕
Next, an image to be displayed on the image display unit 114 by the effect control unit 300 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 59-1, an image is displayed on the image display unit 114 under the control of the effect control unit 300. In the present embodiment, the image displayed on the image display unit 114 includes the decorative symbol 41. Further, the image display unit 114 includes a variable image 51, a hold image 52, a hold number display 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, a returning image 62, a menu display explanation image 63, a volume image 64, and a customer waiting image 65. Initializing image 66, initialization completed image 67, SP reach image 68, SPSP reach image 69, opening image 70, right-handed image 71, round image 72, music selection image 73, round number image 74, point number image 75 , High-accuracy fanning image 76, high-accuracy notification image 77, character selection image 79, high-accuracy start image 80, game continuation instruction image 81, notice image 82, right-handed image during return 83, jackpot notification image 84, game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, a right-handed instruction image 87, a hit image 88, and a button operation image 89 may be displayed.
Each of the above images will be described below.

(Decorative pattern 41)
As shown in FIG. 59-1 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is displayed on the image display unit 114. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol 41 is composed of three symbols. The three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 are arranged so as to be arranged in the left-right direction. When the three symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 are individually described, the symbol arranged on the left side is the "left decorative symbol 41", the symbol arranged in the center is the "intermediate decorative symbol 41", and the symbol is arranged in the center. The symbol arranged on the right side is referred to as "right decorative symbol 41". Further, when the left decorative symbol 41 and the right decorative symbol 41 are collectively described, they are referred to as "left and right decorative symbols 41". Further, when the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 are collectively described, they are referred to as "three decorative symbols 41".

In the variable effect of the decorative symbol 41, the effect control unit 300 first temporarily stops the left decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "2") after displaying the three decorative symbols 41 in a variable manner by, for example, vertical scrolling. Next, the right decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "3") is temporarily stopped, then the middle decorative symbol 41 (for example, the number "1") is temporarily stopped, and finally all the decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. In addition, the combination "213" of the decorative symbol 41 which was stopped and displayed, shown in FIG. 59-1 (1), is an example of the combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the decorative symbol 41, a highly decorative display mode in which a character image or the like is displayed in addition to characters such as numbers (see FIG. 59-1 (1)) and a number. There is a display mode with low decorativeness (see FIG. 63-2 (10)) in which characters such as the above are mainly displayed. Here, the display mode of the decorative symbol 41 is switched according to a change in the gaming state or the progress of the effect. The details will be described later, but for example, the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in the SP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect, and the high-probability time-saving game state, and the decorative symbol 41 with low decorativeness is displayed in other cases. Is displayed.

(Variable image 51)
As shown in FIG. 62 (1), the image display unit 114 is informed that the special symbol is being changed (during the variation display of the decorative symbol 41) by the special symbol fluctuation control unit 233 (see FIG. 5 and the like). The variable image 51 shown is displayed. Then, the variable image 51 starts to be displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed (in the illustrated example, the lower central portion in the display area of the image display unit 114) when the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and the special symbol is displayed. The display disappears when the fluctuation stops. Further, a variable pedestal is displayed in the area where the variable image 51 is displayed.

Here, the display mode of the variable image 51 is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. Further, the variable image 51 is expected to win a big hit based on the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment process due to a change in the display mode of, for example, a color, a pattern, a shape, etc. May inform or suggest.

(Hold image 52)
As shown in FIG. 62 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the reserved image 52 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the current reserved sphere in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). That is, the reserved image 52 is an image showing that the right to determine the jackpot is reserved. Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved image 52 on the display screen is determined based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process.
Further, a holding pedestal is displayed in the area where the holding image 52 is displayed. The variable pedestal of the variable image 51 and the reserved pedestal of the reserved image 52 are displayed in different modes.

Further, the reserved image 52 notifies or suggests the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot by changing the display mode such as color based on, for example, the pre-determination result by the pre-determination process. Here, the display mode such as the color of the reserved image 52 is set so that when the pre-judgment result by the pre-judgment process is a big hit, the display mode has a higher degree of expectation than when it is out of order. There is. For example, when white, blue, yellow, green, red, and gold are set as the colors of the reserved image 52, the degree of expectation may be set to be higher in this order.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51 are basically composed of the same or similar forms, respectively. However, the form may differ between the reserved image 52 and the variable image 51, or between the plurality of reserved images 52, depending on the content of the effect and the progress of the effect.

In the following description, with respect to the four reserved images 52 displayed at the maximum, the "first reserved image 52", the "second reserved image 52", and the "third" are arranged in the order closer to the variable image 51, respectively. It may be referred to as "holding image 52" or "fourth holding image 52".

(Holding number display 55)
As shown in FIG. 62 (1), the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55 based on the information of the storage area corresponding to the hold ball in the RAM 303 (see FIG. 3 and the like). The hold number display 55 is an image showing the hold number. Here, the number of the reserved images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 changes according to the number of reserved images for winning each of the first starting port 121 and the second starting port 122.

(Small design 56)
Here, the display position, display size, design, and the like of the decorative design 41 may change with the progress of, for example, the variation effect. Further, the decorative symbol 41 may be completely or partially hidden by a movable accessory 115 that can be moved with respect to the display screen of the image display unit 114. In such a case, the decorative symbol for notifying the player that the special symbol is originally displayed in a variable manner may be difficult for the player to see.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the small symbol 56 is displayed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 to notify the player that the special symbol is variablely displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, by displaying the small symbol 56, the notification of the jackpot determination result by the decorative symbol 41 and the notification of the type of the jackpot indicated by the decorative symbol 41 are assisted. ..
In the embodiment, the small symbol 56 is displayed on the display screen of the image display unit 114 in such a manner that the player can always see it. That is, the small symbol 56 is not completely or partially hidden by other images, the movable accessory 115, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 62 (1), the small symbol 56 is composed of three symbols corresponding to the decorative symbol 41. The three symbols constituting the small symbol 56 are arranged so as to be arranged in the vertical direction. The small symbol 56 is displayed as an image having a smaller display size than the decorative symbol 41. Further, as described above, the decorative symbol 41 may be displayed in a highly decorative display mode or a less decorative display mode, but the small symbol 56 may be displayed in a less decorative display mode. Displayed only in. However, the small symbol 56 may also be displayed in a highly decorative display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 62 (1), the three symbols constituting the small symbol 56 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. For example, the three symbols constituting the small symbol 56 may be arranged side by side in the left-right direction.

Further, the number of symbols constituting the small symbol 56 does not have to match the number of symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41. For example, when the number of symbols constituting the decorative symbol 41 is three (three digits), the number of symbols constituting the small symbol 56 may be one (one digit).
Further, the small symbol 56 is not limited to the case where one pair is provided in the image display unit 114 with the three symbols as one pair. For example, in the small symbol 56, two or more pairs may be displayed at the same time on the image display unit 114.

(Stage image 61)
As shown in FIG. 59-1 (1), the stage image 61 is displayed on the image display unit 114 as a background of the decorative symbol 41 and the like. The stage image 61 is, for example, an image (stage or the like) related to the content (idol, animation character, or the like) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. In the illustrated example, a space-themed image is displayed as the stage image 61. The stage image 61 is switched, for example, when the variation effect in one stage is performed a predetermined number of times. Further, the stage image 61 may be switched, for example, when a specific variation effect (for example, a variation effect in which the SPSP reach effect is performed) is performed.

(Image 62 during return)
As shown in FIG. 59-1 (4), the returning image 62 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The returning image 62 is an image notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is recovering from the power off state. In the illustrated example, the text "returning" is displayed as the returning image 62. When the recovery from the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is completed, the returning image 62 is hidden.

(Menu display explanation image 63)
As shown in FIG. 59-2 (7), the menu display explanatory image 63 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The menu display explanatory image 63 is an image for explaining a method for displaying the menu screen. The menu screen is a screen on which the items of the effect that can be set by the player are displayed. In the illustrated example, the menu display explanatory image 63 displays an image imitating the effect button 161 and the text “display the menu screen with the button”.

(Volume image 64)
As shown in FIG. 59-2 (7), the volume image 64 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The volume image 64 is an image showing the volume of the sound output from the speaker 156. In the illustrated example, in the volume image 64, a gauge indicates a currently set volume level among a plurality of levels that can be output as the volume level. Further, the volume image 64 shows an image imitating the speaker 156. When the player operates the effect key 162, the volume output from the speaker 156 is adjusted, and the volume image 64 shows a gauge at a stage corresponding to the adjusted volume.

(Customer waiting image 65)
As shown in FIG. 59-2 (8), the customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The customer waiting image 65 is, for example, an image related to the content (idol, animation character, etc.) that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The customer waiting image 65 is displayed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the customer waiting state.

(Image 66 being initialized)
As shown in FIG. 60-1 (4), the image 66 being initialized is displayed on the image display unit 114. The initializing image 66 is an image notifying that the initialization restoration is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "initializing" is displayed as the initializing image 66. When the initialization restoration is completed, the initializing image 66 is hidden.

(Initialization completed image 67)
As shown in FIG. 60-2 (5), the initialization completed image 67 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The initialization completion image 67 is an image that notifies that the initialization restoration is completed. In the illustrated example, the text "initialized" is displayed as the initialization completed image 67.

(SP reach image 68)
As shown in FIG. 63-2 (10), the SP reach image 68 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SP reach image 68 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini game.

(SPSP reach image 69)
As shown in FIG. 63-2 (11), the SPSP reach image 69 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The SPSP reach image 69 is, for example, a moving image in which characters appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 fight.

(Opening image 70)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (10), the opening image 70 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The opening image 70 is an image for notifying the player of the start of the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "BIG Bonus! Congratulations" is displayed as the opening image 70. The opening image 70 has contents suggesting the type of jackpot (for example, the total number of rounds) and the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed.

(Right-handed image 71)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (10), the right-handed image 71 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-handed image 71 is an image for instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the right-handed image 71 is displayed with an arrow mark pointing to the right and the text "right-handed". The right-handed image 71 is displayed, for example, during a jackpot game or in a time-saving game state.

(Image 72 during the round)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (11), the image 72 during the round is displayed on the image display unit 114. The image 72 during this round is a moving image of a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100. The in-round image 72 is displayed during the round in the jackpot game.

(Music selection image 73)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (11), the music selection image 73 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The music selection image 73 is an image for selecting a music output from the speaker 156 during the jackpot game being executed. In the illustrated example, "music A" is selected in the music selection image 73. When the player operates the effect key 162 to select a song, the selected song is output from the speaker 156, and the name of the selected song is displayed on the song selection image 73.

(Round number image 74)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (11), the round number image 74 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The round number image 74 is an image for notifying the player of the number of rounds of the round currently being executed in the jackpot game. In the illustrated example, the text "Round 1" is displayed as the round number image 74.

(Point number image 75)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (11), the point number image 75 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The point number image 75 is an image for notifying the player of the number of prize balls due to the winning of the game ball in the big winning opening 125 in the big hit game. In the illustrated example, the text "50pt" is displayed as the point number image 75.

(Highly accurate fan image 76)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (12), the highly accurate fanned image 76 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The high-probability fanning image 76 is an image that fanning whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving gaming state. The high-accuracy fanned image 76 is, for example, a moving image in which a character appearing in the content that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 plays a mini-game.

(High accuracy notification image 77)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (13), the high-accuracy notification image 77 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The high-probability notification image 77 is an image suggesting or notifying that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving gaming state.

(Character selection image 79)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (16), the character selection image 79 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The character selection image 79 is an image for the player to select a character that appears in the production after the jackpot game is completed. In the character selection image 79, the character corresponding to the operation of the effect key 162 by the player is displayed.

(High accuracy start image 80)
As shown in FIG. 64-3 (17), the high-accuracy start image 80 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The high-probability start image 80 is an image that notifies the start of a high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the illustrated example, the text "Excite mode entered !!" is displayed as the high-accuracy start image 80.

(Game continuation instruction image 81)
As shown in FIG. 65-2 (5), the game continuation instruction image 81 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The game continuation instruction image 81 is an image for instructing the player to continuously execute the game. More specifically, the game continuation instruction image 81 is an image for instructing the continuation of the game played by the player before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off. In the illustrated example, the text "Please continue the game" is displayed as the game continuation instruction image 81. The game continuation instruction image 81 may be an image for notifying that the game is being executed, such as a text "a game is being performed".

(Preliminary image 82)
As shown in FIG. 66-2 (9), the preview image 82 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The preview image 82 is an image that announces that there is a possibility of winning a big hit in the fluctuation production after the fluctuation being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "Chance at the next fluctuation !?" is displayed as the preview image 82. The preview image 82 is displayed based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process.

(Right-handed image 83 during return)
As shown in FIG. 67-2 (11), the right-handed image 83 during the return is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-handed image 83 during the return is an image for instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is recovering from the power off state. .. The returning right-handed image 83 of the present embodiment has a different display mode from the right-handed image 71 (see FIG. 64-2 (10)). More specifically, the right-handed image 83 during the return is displayed with an arrow mark that is thicker than the right-handed image 71. Further, the text "right-handed" is displayed on the right-handed image 83 during the return.

(Big hit notification image 84)
As shown in FIG. 68 (3), the jackpot notification image 84 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The jackpot notification image 84 is an image suggesting or notifying that the jackpot game is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "Big hit in progress" is displayed as the big hit notification image 84.

(Game start notification image 85)
As shown in FIG. 68 (3), the game start notification image 85 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The game start notification image 85 is an image that suggests or notifies that the game is being executed. In the illustrated example, the text "The game has started" is displayed as the game start notification image 85.

(Game execution instruction image 86)
As shown in FIG. 68 (3), the game execution instruction image 86 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The game execution instruction image 86 is an image for instructing the player to perform the game. In the illustrated example, the text "Please play the game" is displayed on the game execution instruction image 86.

(Right-handed instruction image 87)
As shown in FIG. 68 (3), the right-handed instruction image 87 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The right-handed instruction image 87 is an image for instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side in the game area 111. In the illustrated example, the text "Please hit right" is displayed as the right-handed instruction image 87.

(Hit image 88)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (11), the hit image 88 is displayed on the image display unit 114. The hit image 88 is an image showing the numbers of the decorative symbols 41 combined in the variable effect when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. In the illustrated example, the number "6" is displayed.

(Button operation image 89)
As shown in FIG. 71-1 (6), the button operation image 89 is displayed on the image display unit 114. By displaying the button operation image 89, it is possible to recognize that it is the timing for the player to operate the effect button 161. In the illustrated example, an image imitating the effect button 161 is displayed as the button operation image 89.

[Production example]
In this embodiment, various effects are performed. For example, the production example includes a change effect, a chance eye display effect, a high-accuracy fanning effect, a high-accuracy notification effect, a high-accuracy start notification effect, a next fluctuation expectation effect, an operation effect, and an accessory operation effect. Hereinafter, each production will be described.

(Change production)
As shown in FIG. 63-1 (2), the change effect is an effect of changing the display mode of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52. More specifically, the change effect is an effect of changing the display color, pattern, shape, or the like (hereinafter, referred to as "display color or the like") of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52. In the present embodiment, the display color of the variable image 51 or the reserved image 52 is changed to notify or suggest to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot. The change effect can be executed based on the pre-determination result of the pre-determination process. In the illustrated example, any of "blue", "yellow", "green", "red", and "gold" is selected as the display color. For example, the final display color of the variable image may be set in the order of blue, yellow, green, red, and gold so that the later the order, the higher the expectation. In the illustrated example, the third reserved image 52 is displayed in blue by executing the change effect.

(Chance eye display production)
As shown in FIG. 63-1 (3), the chance eye display effect is an effect of displaying the chance eye. Here, the chance eyes are three decorative symbols 41 that are combined by different symbols of the same color. The chance eye display effect, for example, informs or suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit in the variable display of the next and subsequent special symbols. The chance eye display effect is one aspect of the advance notice effect. In the illustrated example, the entire three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in blue due to the chance eye display effect.

(Highly accurate production)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (12), the high-probability fanning effect is an effect of fanning whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 after the end of the jackpot game becomes a high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the high-accuracy fanning effect, the high-accuracy fanning image 76 is displayed.

(Highly accurate notification production)
As shown in FIG. 64-2 (13), the high-probability notification effect is an effect that suggests or notifies that the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 after the end of the jackpot game will be a high-probability time-saving gaming state. In the high-accuracy notification effect, the high-accuracy notification image 77 is displayed.

(Highly accurate start notification production)
As shown in FIG. 64-3 (17), the high-probability start notification effect is an effect of notifying the start of a high-probability time-saving game state. In the high-accuracy start notification effect, the high-accuracy start image 80 is displayed.

(Next fluctuation expectation production)
As shown in FIG. 66-2 (9), the next fluctuation expectation effect is an effect that expects a jackpot to be won in the subsequent fluctuations after the fluctuation being executed. This next fluctuation expectation effect is an example of a notice effect. In the next fluctuation expectation effect, the preview image 82 is displayed.

(Operation production)
As shown in FIG. 71-1 (6), the operation effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 161. In the operation effect, the button operation image 89 is displayed.

(Character movement production)
As shown in FIG. 71-1 (7), the accessory movement effect is an effect in which the movable accessory 115 moves to the front side of the image display unit 114 and covers the entire or part of the image display area in the image display unit 114. is there. In addition, the movable accessory 115 may emit light as an effect of the accessory operation. Further, as the accessory operation effect, the movable accessory 115 may be moved to a position different from the front side of the image display unit 114. Further, as the accessory operation effect, the movable accessory 115 may emit light without moving.

[Variable lamp and hold lamp]
Next, the variable lamp and the holding lamp of the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 110 is provided with a first variable lamp 133 and a second variable lamp 134 indicating that the special symbol is changing. The first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 have an LED light source capable of lighting in a predetermined emission color, and are controlled by the effect control unit 300.
The first variable lamp 133 corresponds to the first starting port 121. Further, the second variable lamp 134 corresponds to the second starting port 122.

Then, the variable display is realized by continuing the state in which the first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval with a predetermined display color (for example, blue). When the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 221 of the display 130, the variable display for the special symbol on the first variable lamp 133 is performed. Further, when the special symbol is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 222 of the display 130, the variable display for the special symbol on the second variable lamp 134 is performed.

Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221, the first variable lamp 133 for the first special symbol remains lit in a display color (for example, red) suggesting a jackpot. Similarly, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 222, the second variable lamp 134 remains lit in a display color (for example, red) suggesting a jackpot.
Then, in the present embodiment, the first variable lamp 133 or the second variable lamp 134 is made to be variable display and stop display along with the variable display and stop display of the special symbol. However, as described above, the first variable lamp 133 or the second variable lamp 134 operates the LED light source in a manner in which the player cannot recognize the type of the decorative symbol.

In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol 41 displayed on the image display unit 114 performs variable display and stop display in a manner in which the player can recognize the type of the decorative symbol in accordance with the variable display and stop display of the special symbol. Similarly, the small symbol 56 displayed on the image display unit 114 performs the variable display and the stop display in a manner in which the player can recognize the type of the decorative symbol in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol.
On the other hand, the first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 of the present embodiment emit the LED light source in a manner in which the player cannot recognize the type of the decorative symbol in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. .. That is, the first fluctuating lamp 133 and the second fluctuating lamp 134 simply notify the player that the decorative symbol is fluctuating.

By the way, in the present embodiment, for example, even if a problem occurs in the display of the decorative symbol 41 or the small symbol 56 on the image display unit 114, the special symbol is provided by the first variable lamp 133 or the second variable lamp 134. It is guaranteed to notify the player as a production that is fluctuating. However, if the first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 are to strictly display even the types of decorative symbols, for example, the first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 are lit according to the number of types of decorative symbols. It is necessary to prepare variations of the pattern and turn on the first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 according to the plurality of variations. Then, the load on the lamp control unit 320 that controls the first fluctuation lamp 133 and the second fluctuation lamp 134 may increase, and the load on the effect control unit 300 that controls the lamp control unit 320 may increase.
Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, the first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 are not notified of the type of the decorative symbol, but are notified that the decorative symbol is changing as a minimum function. I am trying to do it.

However, apart from the above-mentioned viewpoint of suppressing the load of image control, for example, the functions of the first fluctuation lamp 133 and the second fluctuation lamp 134 may be performed on the display screen of the image display unit 114. That is, the functions of the first variable lamp 133 and the second variable lamp 134 may be realized by the display image.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the game board 110 is provided with a first holding lamp 135 and a second holding lamp 136 indicating that holding has occurred. The first holding lamp 135 and the second holding lamp 136 have an LED light source capable of lighting in a predetermined emission color, and are controlled by the effect control unit 300.
The first holding lamp 135 corresponds to the first starting port 121. Further, the second holding lamp 136 corresponds to the second starting port 122.

Then, the presence / absence of hold and the number of hold are suggested by displaying the first hold lamp 135 and the second hold lamp 136 in a predetermined lighting mode. When the first special symbol hold indicator 218 of the display 130 operates in the lighting mode indicating the predetermined number of holds, the first hold lamp 135 operates in the lighting mode indicating the predetermined number of holds. Further, when the second special symbol hold indicator 219 of the display 130 operates in the lighting mode indicating the predetermined number of holds, the second hold lamp 136 operates in the lighting mode indicating the predetermined number of holds.

The functions of the first holding lamp 135 and the second holding lamp 136 may be performed on the display screen of the image display unit 114. That is, the functions of the first holding lamp 135 and the second holding lamp 136 may be realized by the display image.

FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing performed by the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from the power off state.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2, the processing performed by the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from the power off state will be specifically described. In the processing of the effect control unit 300 shown in FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2, a command (see FIG. 25-2) for controlling the power on at the time of restoration is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. It is done by.

(Processing example 1)
First, as shown in FIG. 59-1 (1), with the effect control unit 300 ending the variation of the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 having a high decorativeness on the screen of the image display unit 114 It is assumed that a certain "213" has been fixedly stopped. At this time, the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55, the small symbol 56, and the stage image 61. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122 both indicate "0", and the small symbol 56 "213" is fixedly stopped.

At this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, the first variable lamp 133 is stopped and displayed. At this time, a predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 156. This BGM is a BGM defined according to the type of the stage image 61.
At this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 are emitting white light. The movable accessory 115, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 are all regarded as light emitting means capable of emitting light.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power off state, the image is not displayed on the image display unit 114 as shown in FIG. 59-1 (2). More specifically, the image display unit 114 is turned off. At this time, the special symbol is turned off on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, the first variable lamp 133 is turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 are all turned off.

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power off state. That is, in the processing example 1, the non-initialization restoration is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 59-1 (3), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. On the other hand, in the first variable lamp 133, the extinguished state is maintained. Further, the image display unit 114 also maintains the off state. Further, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. Further, each of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 is maintained in the off state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59-1 (4), the returning image 62 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first variable lamp 133 is stopped and displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (5), the decorative symbol 41 "315" is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, "315", which is a small symbol 56, is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, the image display unit 114 displays the hold number display 55. Further, the image display unit 114 displays a space-themed image as the stage image 61. That is, the same stage image 61 as immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off is displayed. At this time, the non-initialization restoration process is performed. In the non-initialization return processing, each of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 emit blue light. At this time, the effect of the effect button 161 being operated by the player is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (6), the non-initialization test operation process is performed. In the non-initialization test operation process, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C each descend so as to cover a part of the image display unit 114. Further, in the non-initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 is moved from the non-protruding state to the protruding state. The operation of the movable accessory 115 in the non-initialization test operation process is described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 56, and the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, first movable member 73a, No. 1) when the RWM clear process is not performed. 2 This is an example of the initial operation of the movable member 73b). Further, at this time, the effect produced by the player operating the effect button 161 is not executed. Further, at this time, the non-initialization restoration process is continuously performed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (7), the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C are raised, and the effect button 161 returns from the protruding state to the non-protruding state. , The non-initialization test operation process is completed. In addition, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 all emit white light. That is, in each of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power off state. It returns to the light emission mode before the above. The light emitting mode before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off is hereinafter referred to as a normal light emitting mode. This normal light emitting mode includes a light emitting mode when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in the power off state. In other words, the normal light emitting mode is the light emitting mode of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the initialization return and the non-initialization return are not performed.
Further, the operation mode before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off is referred to as a normal operation mode below. This normal operating mode includes an operating mode when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not in a power-off state. In other words, the normal operating mode is the operating mode of the pachinko gaming machine 100 when the initialization return and the non-initialization return are not performed. Here, the normal light emitting mode is an example of the normal operating mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 59-2 (8), the customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. That is, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off.

In the processing example 1, it has been described that the first fluctuation lamp 133 is stopped and displayed when the returning image 62 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first fluctuation lamp 133 may be stopped and displayed after the returning image 62 is displayed. Further, for example, when the returning image 62 is displayed, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. Further, after the returning image 62 is displayed, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221 and then the first variable lamp 133 may be stopped and displayed. That is, the first variable lamp 133 may be stopped and displayed after the special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 221.

Further, in the process example 1, the effect button 161 operates in the non-initialization test operation process regardless of whether or not the player operates the effect button 161, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the non-initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 may be operated by the player operating the effect button 161.

(Processing example 2)
60-1 and 60-2 are diagrams showing an example of processing performed by the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from the power off state.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60-1 and 60-2, another specific example (processing example) regarding the processing performed by the game control unit 200 and the effect control unit 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from the power off state. 2) will be described.
In the following description, the differences from the processing example 1 will be mainly described, and the description of the points that are the same as the processing example 1 may be omitted. Further, in the processing of the effect control unit 300 shown in FIGS. 60-1 and 60-2, a command (see FIG. 25-2) for controlling the power on when the RAM is cleared is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. It is done by being done.

First, as shown in FIG. 60-1 (1), as the effect control unit 300 ends the variation of the previous special symbol, the decorative symbol 41 “213” is displayed on the screen of the image display unit 114. Has been confirmed and stopped. At this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, the first variable lamp 133 is stopped and displayed. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 all emit white light.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 60-1 (2). At this time, the special symbol is turned off on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, the first variable lamp 133 is turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 are all turned off.

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is ON, the pachinko gaming machine 100 recovers from the power off state. That is, in the process example 2, the initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 60-1 (3), the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60-1 (4), the image 66 being initialized is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the first variable lamp 133 is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (5), the decorative symbol 41 "753" is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, "753", which is a small symbol 56, is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, the image display unit 114 displays a space-themed image as the stage image 61. That is, the same stage image 61 as immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off is displayed. At this time, the initialization completed image 67 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the initialization notification process is performed. In the initialization notification process, the fact that the initialization process has been performed is notified by voice. More specifically, in the initialization notification process, a voice "initialized" is output from the speaker 156, and a warning sound is output following this voice. At this time, the initialization / recovery process is performed. In the initialization restoration process, each of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 emit red light. At this time, the effect produced by the player operating the effect button 161 is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (6), the initialization test operation process is performed. In the initialization test operation process, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C each descend so as to cover a part of the image display unit 114. Further, in the initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 moves from the non-protruding state to the protruding state and vibrates. The operation of the movable accessory 115 in the initialization test operation process is described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 56, and the movable effect device 73 (first movable member 73a, second movable member 73a, second movable) when the RWM clear process is performed. This is an example of the initial operation of the member 73b). At this time, the initialization notification process is performed again. Further, at this time, the initialization / recovery process is continuously performed. At this time, the effect produced by the player operating the effect button 161 is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (7), the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C are raised, and the effect button 161 is changed from the protruding state to the non-protruding state. Return and the initialization test operation process is completed. At this time, the initialization notification process is performed again. Further, at this time, the initialization / recovery process is continuously performed. At this time, the effect produced by the player operating the effect button 161 is not executed.

Then, when the third initialization notification process is completed, as shown in FIG. 60-2 (8), the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed on the image display unit 114. That is, when no sound is output from the speaker 156, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. At this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 all emit white light. That is, the light emitting modes of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 all return to the normal light emitting mode.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60-3 (9), the customer waiting image 65 is displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. That is, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output from the time when the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. In other words, in the speaker 156, when each of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, the right movable accessory 115C, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, and the effect button 161 changes to the normal light emitting mode. Therefore, the state where no sound is output is maintained.

In the process example 2, the effect button 161 is moving in the initialization test operation process regardless of whether or not the player operates the effect button 161, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, in the initialization test operation process, the effect button 161 may be moved by the player operating the effect button 161.

Further, in the processing example 2, it has been described that the initialization notification processing is started when the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the initialization notification process may be started when the initializing image 66 is displayed. That is, the initialization notification process may be performed before the decorative symbol 41 or the stage image 61 is displayed. Then, when the decorative symbol 41 or the stage image 61 is displayed, the initialization notification process is completed, and the sound may not be output from the speaker 156.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the initialization return is performed, the effect control unit 300 operates the frame lamp 157 and the like in an operation mode different from the case where the non-initialization return is performed. The initialization return is regarded as the first return accompanied by the initialization of the information stored in the RAM 203. Further, the non-initialization return is regarded as a second return that does not involve the initialization of the information stored in the RAM 203. Further, the frame lamp 157 is an example of the effect means for executing the effect. Further, each of the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 is also regarded as the effect means.

In this case, for example, the clerk in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed returns to the initialization and the non-initialization by confirming the operation mode when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is restored from the power off state. It is possible to recognize which of the above has been performed. Therefore, for example, when the clerk in the hall turns on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 with the RAM clear switch 228 turned off even though the purpose is to restore the initialization, the operating mode of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is changed. By confirming, it is possible to recognize that the initialization return has not been performed and to perform the initialization return. That is, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 100 from being left uninitialized and restored despite the purpose of the hall clerk returning to initialization.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 operates the effect button 161 and the movable accessory 115 in a special operation mode different from the case where the non-initialization return is performed when the initialization return is performed. Then, when the operation mode of the effect button 161 is changed from the special operation mode to the normal operation mode, the effect control unit 300 also changes the operation mode of the movable accessory 115 from the special operation mode to the normal operation mode. The special operation mode is an operation mode of the effect button 161 and the movable accessory 115 when the initialization return is performed. Further, the effect button is regarded as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

In this case, the operation mode of the effect button 161 and the movable accessory 115 is compared with the case where the operation mode of any one of the effect button 161 and the movable accessory 115 is changed to the normal operation mode and the other operation mode is not changed. Since the change is conspicuous, it becomes easier to recognize the change in the operating mode of the effect button 161 and the movable accessory 115. Therefore, it becomes easy to confirm the operation of the effect button 161 and the movable accessory 115 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from the power off state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the initialization restoration is performed, at least a part of the frame lamp 157 and at least a part of the panel lamp 116 emit light in a special light emitting mode different from the case where the non-initialization restoration is performed. When at least a part of the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157 changes from the special light emitting mode to the normal light emitting mode, at least a part of the light emitting mode of the panel lamp 116 also changes from the special light emitting mode to the normal light emitting mode.

In this case, when one of the light emitting modes of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 changes to the normal light emitting mode, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 changes as compared with the case where the other light emitting mode does not change. As much as it stands out, changes in the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 can be easily recognized. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from the power off state, it becomes easy to confirm the light emission of the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 moves at least one of the plurality of movable accessories 115 in the same manner when the initialization return is performed and when the non-initialization return is performed. It is moved according to the mode, and at least one of the plurality of movable accessories 115 is operated according to a different mode depending on whether the initialization return is performed or the non-initialization return is performed. Each of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C is regarded as a movable portion. Further, in a broad sense, the effect button 161 is also regarded as a movable part.

In this case, regardless of whether the initialization return or the non-initialization return is performed, the movable accessory 115 can be made to perform the test operation necessary for returning the pachinko gaming machine 100 from the power off state. On the other hand, for example, the clerk in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 100 is installed can recognize whether the initialization return or the non-initialization return has been performed by checking the operation mode of the movable accessory 115. ..

Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161, the timing at which the light emitting mode changes to the normal light emitting mode when the initialization / return processing is being performed is synchronized with each other. ing.
In this case, it becomes easier to recognize that the light emitting modes of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 have been changed to the normal light emitting modes.

Further, in the present embodiment, the stage image 61 (see FIG. 59-2 (5)) displayed when the non-initialization restoration is performed and the stage image 61 (displayed when the initialization restoration is performed) (see FIG. 59-2 (5)). (See FIG. 60-2 (5)) is the same. On the other hand, the initializing image 66 is displayed when the initialization restoration is performed, but the initializing image 66 is not displayed when the non-initialization restoration is performed. That is, when the initialization return is performed, an image that is not displayed when the non-initialization return is performed is displayed from the time when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off until the stage image 61 is displayed.
In this case, the clerk in the hall can recognize whether the initialization recovery or the non-initialization recovery has been performed by checking the display contents of the image display unit 114.

Even when the initialization return is performed, the resetting image 62 may be displayed instead of the initialization image 66 by the time the stage image 61 is displayed. In this case, in addition to the returning image 62, an image suggesting or notifying that the initialization process is being performed may be displayed. Further, the display content on the image display unit 114 until the stage image 61 is displayed may be the same depending on whether the initialization recovery is performed or the non-initialization recovery is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting modes of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 are changed to the normal light emitting modes at the timing when a specific image is displayed. Here, examples of the specific image include a menu display explanatory image 63, a volume image 64, and the like.
In this case, even if a specific image is displayed, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 100 from being mistakenly recognized as having an abnormality because the light emitting mode of each light emitting means does not change to the normal light emitting mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the initialization return is performed, a sound that is not output when the non-initialization return is performed is output.
In this case, the clerk in the hall can recognize whether the initialization recovery or the non-initialization recovery has been performed by listening to the sound output from the speaker 156.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the sound output when the initialization restoration is performed, that is, the sound output in the initialization notification process, a specific image such as the menu display explanation image 63 or the volume image 64 is displayed. It will not be output at the timing.
In this case, it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 100 from being mistakenly recognized as having an abnormality because the sound generated in the initialization notification process continues to be output even after the display of a specific image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light emitting modes of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 are changed to the normal light emitting modes at the timing when the sound generated in the initialization notification process is no longer output. I'm changing.
In this case, even if the sound generated in the initialization notification process is no longer output, the light emitting mode of each light emitting means does not return to the normal light emitting mode, so that it is possible to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 100 from being mistakenly recognized as having an abnormality. ..

In the present embodiment, each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 has a light emitting mode different from the normal light emitting mode during the non-initialization restoration process. , Not limited to this. The light emitting mode at the time of the non-initialization restoration processing of each light emitting means may be a normal light emitting mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, for each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161, the emission color at the time of the initialization restoration processing is different from the emission color at the time of the non-initialization restoration processing. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, the mode of blinking the light during the initialization / recovery process in each light emitting means may be different from the mode of blinking the light during the non-initialization / recovery process. That is, the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization / returning process in each light emitting means may be different from the light emitting mode at the time of the non-initialization / returning process.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the initialization / return processing, the light emitting modes of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the initialization restoration process, at least two or more of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 may have the same light emitting mode, and all the light emitting modes may be different. You may.

Further, in the present embodiment, for each of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161, the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization return processing is different from the light emitting mode at the time of the non-initialization return processing. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, for at least one of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161, the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization return processing is different from the light emitting mode at the time of the non-initialization return processing. You may. In this case, the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization return processing in any of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 is the same as the light emitting mode at the time of the non-initialization return processing. It may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 are synchronized with each other at the timing of changing from the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization return processing to the normal light emitting mode. Not limited to.
For example, the timing at which any two of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 changes from the light emitting mode during the initialization return processing to the normal light emitting mode, and the other two return to initialization. The timing may be different from the timing at which the light emitting mode at the time of processing changes to the normal light emitting mode. Further, for example, the timing at which any three of the panel lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 changes from the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization / returning process to the normal light emitting mode, and the other one at the time of the initialization / returning process. The timing may be different from the timing of changing from the light emitting mode of the above to the normal light emitting mode. Further, among the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161, the target for synchronizing the timing of changing from the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization notification process to the normal light emitting mode may be any combination. Good.

Further, for example, when the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp 116 emit light in a light emitting mode different from that in the non-initialization returning process during the initialization return processing, the portion that emits light in the different light emitting mode is the frame lamp 157 and the board lamp. It does not have to be the whole of 116. That is, at the time of the initialization return processing, a part of the frame lamp 157 and a part of the panel lamp 116 emit light in a light emitting mode different from that at the time of the non-initialization restoration processing, and the other part of the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 The other part may emit light in the same light emitting mode as in the non-initialization restoration process. In this case, the portion of the frame lamp 157 that emits light in a light emitting mode different from that in the non-initialization recovery process during the initialization / recovery process is regarded as the first light emitting unit. Further, the portion of the panel lamp 116 that emits light in a light emitting mode different from that in the non-initialization recovery process during the initialization / recovery process is regarded as a second light emitting unit. Further, the timing at which the light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit changes from the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization / returning process to the normal light emitting mode is changed, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit changes from the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization / returning process to the normal light emitting mode. It may be synchronized with the timing.
Further, for example, when the frame lamp 157 and the panel lamp 116 synchronize the timing of changing from the light emitting mode to the normal light emitting mode at the time of the initialization return processing, the portion where the timing of changing the light emitting mode is synchronized is the frame lamp 157 and the panel. It does not have to be the entire lamp 116, but may be at least a part of the frame lamp 157 and at least a part of the panel lamp 116. That is, when any two or more of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 change from the light emitting mode at the time of the initialization return processing to the normal light emitting mode, the timing is synchronized with each other. The portion where the timing at which the light emitting mode changes is synchronized may be at least a part of each light emitting means.

Further, in the present embodiment, the three movable accessories 115 operate in the same manner in the initialization test operation process and the non-initialization test operation process, but are not limited thereto.
For example, one or two of the three movable accessories 115 may be made to move differently in the initialization test operation process and the non-initialization test operation process.

Further, in the present embodiment, each of the three movable accessories 115 has a different light emitting mode between the initialization restoration process and the non-initialization restoration process, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, one or two of the three movable accessories 115 may have the same light emitting mode in the initialization restoration process and the non-initialization restoration process. That is, at least one of the three movable accessories 115 may have a light emitting mode different between the initialization restoration process and the non-initialization restoration process.

(Period until the customer waiting image 65 is displayed)
Next, the period from when the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved until the customer waiting image 65 is displayed will be described.
FIG. 61 shows a period from when the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved in the processing example 1 until the customer waiting image 65 is displayed, and in processing example 2, the power-off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. It is explanatory drawing of the period from the time until the customer waiting image 65 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), in the process example 1, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 receives the power supply and the power off state is resolved in the power off state, the returning image 62 (see FIG. 59-1 (4)). ) Is displayed. After that, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, and the non-initialization restoration process is started. Further, when the time T1 elapses after the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the non-initialization test operation process is started. Further, when the time T2 elapses from the start of the non-initialization test operation process, the non-initialization test operation process is completed. Further, when the time T3 elapses after the non-initialization test operation process is completed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 is changed to the normal light emitting mode. Further, when the time T4 elapses after the menu display explanatory image 63 is displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed.

That is, when the deinitialization restoration is performed, the menu display explanatory image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed when "time T1 + time T2 + time T3" has elapsed after the decorative symbol 41 is displayed. Further, when "time T1 + time T2 + time T3 + time T4" elapses after the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), in the process example 2, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 receives the power supply and the power off state is resolved in the power off state, the image 66 during initialization (FIG. 60-1 (FIG. 60-1). 4) See) is displayed. After that, the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, and the initialization / restoration process is started. At this time, the first initialization notification process is performed. Further, when the time T5 elapses after the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the initialization test operation process is started. This time T5 is equal to the time T1 (see FIG. 61 (A)). Further, when the time T6 elapses after the first initialization notification process is performed, the second initialization notification process is performed. Further, when the time T7 elapses from the start of the initialization test operation process, the initialization test operation process is completed. This time T7 is equal to time T2. Further, when the time T8 elapses after the second initialization notification process is performed, the third initialization notification process is performed. This time T8 is equal to time T6. Further, when the time T9 elapses after the third initialization notification process is performed, the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed. At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 is changed to the normal light emitting mode. Further, when the time T10 elapses after the menu display explanatory image 63 is displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed. Here, the time T9 is equal to the time T3. Also, time T10 is equal to time T4.

That is, when the initialization restoration is performed, the menu display explanatory image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed when "time T6 + time T8 + time T9" has elapsed after the decorative symbol 41 is displayed. Further, when "time T6 + time T8 + time T9 + time T10" elapses after the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the customer waiting image 65 is displayed. Here, in the process example 2, the time from the display of the decorative symbol 41 to the display of the menu display explanatory image 63 is longer than that in the process example 1 because the initialization notification process is performed. Further, in the process example 2, the time from the display of the decorative symbol 41 to the display of the customer waiting image 65 is longer than that in the process example 1 because the initialization notification process is performed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the image display unit 114 displays the first image when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from the power off state, and then displays the second image different from the first image. .. The time from the display of the first image to the display of the second image differs between the case where the initialization recovery is performed and the case where the non-initialization recovery is performed. Examples of the first image include a decorative symbol 41, a hold number display 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, and the like. Further, examples of the second image include a menu display explanatory image 63, a volume image 64, a customer waiting image 65, and the like.
In this case, for example, the clerk in the hall recognizes whether the initialization recovery or the non-initialization recovery has been performed by checking the time from the display of the first image to the display of the second image. can do.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the initialization recovery is performed, the second image is displayed after the first image is displayed, as compared with the case where the non-initialization recovery is performed by the amount of the initialization notification processing. Is displayed for a long time.
In this case, for example, by displaying the second image during the initialization notification process, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from paying attention to the second image and forgetting to check the initialization notification process.

In the present embodiment, it has been described that when the non-initialization return is performed, the state in which no sound is output is maintained after the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the non-initialization return is performed, a sound suggesting or notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has returned from the power off state may be output. Then, the sound output in this case may be different from the sound output in the initialization notification process. Further, in this case, the notification period that the initialization process has been performed in the initialization notification process suggests or notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has returned from the power off state when the non-initialization return is performed. It may be longer than the period of time. Here, the notification period that the initialization processing has been performed in the initialization notification processing is from the period that suggests or notifies that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has recovered from the power off state when the non-initialization recovery is performed. The lengthening also includes that neither suggestion nor notification that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has returned from the power off state is given when the non-initialization return is performed. In addition, the number of notifications that the initialization processing has been performed in the initialization notification processing is greater than the number of times that the pachinko gaming machine 100 has returned from the power-off state when the non-initialization restoration is performed. It may be increased.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the non-initialization restoration is performed, the non-initialization restoration processing is performed when the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the deinitialization return is performed, the deinitialization return process may be performed before the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed. Further, in this case, when the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 may be changed to the normal light emitting mode.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the initialization return is performed, the initialization return process is performed when the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when the initialization return is performed, the initialization return process may be performed before the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed. Further, in this case, when the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 157, the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 may be changed to the normal light emitting mode.
Further, for example, before the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the initialization return processing is performed at the start or after the initialization notification processing, and after the initialization notification processing is completed, the frame lamp 157, The light emitting mode of the board lamp 116, the movable accessory 115, and the effect button 161 may be changed to the normal light emitting mode. Further, the stage image 61 or the decorative symbol 41 may be displayed when the light emitting mode of each light emitting means changes to the normal light emitting mode. That is, the timing at which the light emitting mode of each light emitting means changes to the normal light emitting mode or the timing at which the decorative symbol 41 is displayed may be delayed by the amount of the initialization notification process.

Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the customer waiting image 65 is displayed when a predetermined time elapses after the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, when a predetermined time elapses after the menu display explanation image 63 and the volume image 64 are displayed, a power saving image suggesting or notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power saving mode for reducing the power consumption is displayed. You may. In this case, the power saving image is captured as the second image.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like will be specifically described.
Note that FIG. 62 is a variation effect executed when “ER1” is selected as the “variation effect pattern” in FIG. 58. When "ER1" is selected as the "variable effect pattern", an effect such as "normal" is not executed. Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above processing examples will be mainly described, and the description of the points corresponding to each processing example may be omitted.

(Variable production example 1)
First, as shown in FIG. 62 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped on the screen of the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the effect control unit 300. At this time, the variable image 51 and the reserved image 52 are displayed in white on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the hold number display 55 and the small symbol 56 are displayed. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first start port 121 indicates "4", and the hold number display 55 of the second start port 122 indicates "0". At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (2), the decorative symbol 41 starts to fluctuate with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 are displayed in a variable manner by displaying the numbers "1" to "9" in order, respectively. That is, in the present embodiment, the numbers of the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 can be changed individually. The left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 may display characters different from numbers, such as English characters. In this way, when the variable display of the next special symbol is started, the reserved image 52 moves the second, third, and fourth reserved images 52 toward the display position of the variable image 51. At this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51. When it is shown in the drawing that the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are variablely displayed (scrolled) at a particularly high speed, the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are indicated by arrows (↓) for easy understanding. .. Further, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates “3”. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.
In the example shown in FIG. 62, in the decorative symbol 41, the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and move (scroll) in the vertical direction when they are displayed in a variable manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this aspect. For example, in the decorative symbol 41, the left decorative symbol 41, the middle decorative symbol 41, and the right decorative symbol 41 may be arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and each of them may be moved (scrolled) in the horizontal direction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (3), the left decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "4", which is the left decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops. When the decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped in the drawing, it is expressed by using a display similar to the double quotation mark around the decorative symbol 41 for easy understanding. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (4), the right decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "1", which is the right decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (5), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 scrolls at a low speed and then temporarily stops at a position where it has been fixedly stopped until the start of fluctuation. More specifically, the number "2", which is the intermediate decorative symbol 41, temporarily stops. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 62 (6), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. The combination "421" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "421" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (7), the decorative symbol 41 starts to fluctuate with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.

In addition, in the variation effect example 1, it has been described that the BGM is continuously output from the speaker 156 over the variation of a plurality of special symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the output of the BGM from the speaker 156 may be interrupted at the timing when the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped (see FIGS. 62 (1) and 62 (6)).

(Variable production example 2)
63-1 and 63-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 2) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63-1 and 63-2.
63-1 and 63-2 are variation effects executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 58. When "ER3" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", "N1" is executed as "normal", "SP1" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP1" is executed as "SPSP reach". Will be executed. Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above processing examples and the variation effect example 1 will be mainly described, and the points that match each processing example and the variation effect example 1 may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the effect control unit 300.

Then, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the change effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the third reserved image 52 is displayed in blue by executing the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (3), when the number "351", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped, the chance eye display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entire three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in blue due to the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (4), the change of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the change of the next special symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (5), when the number "572", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped, the chance eye display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entire three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in green due to the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (6), the change of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the change of the next special symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (7), when the number "713", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped, the chance eye display effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the entire three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in red due to the chance eye display effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-1 (8), the change of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the change of the next special symbol. At this time, the change effect is executed. In the illustrated example, the variable image 51 is displayed in red due to the change effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (9), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped to bring it into the reach state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (10), the SP reach effect is executed. While the SP reach effect is being executed, the SP reach image 68 is displayed. Further, when the SP reach effect is being executed, the left and right decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a small display mode and a display mode with low decorativeness. In the illustrated example, the left decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display unit 114, and the right decorative symbol 41 is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display unit 114.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (11), the SPSP reach effect is executed. While the SPSP reach effect is being executed, the SPSP reach image 69 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (12), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops at the number "5". At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped in a display mode having low decorativeness and in a display mode larger than that of the left and right decorative symbols 41.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (13), the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped.
Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 63-2 (14), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. The combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "454" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

(Variable production example 3)
64-1 to 64-3 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 3) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64-1 to 64-3.
It should be noted that FIGS. 64-1 to 64-3 are variation effects executed when "EB9" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 57. When "EB9" is selected as this "variable effect pattern", "N2" is executed as "normal", "SP3" is executed as "SP reach", and "SPSP3" is executed as "SPSP reach". Will be executed. Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 64-1 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the effect control unit 300.
Then, as shown in FIG. 64-1 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1 (3), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "6" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the number "6" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped to bring it into the reach state.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1 (4), the SP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1 (5), the SPSP reach effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1 (6), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. In the illustrated example, by displaying the decorative symbol 41 in the combination of "666", the player is notified that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, at this time, the display size of the decorative symbol 41 is larger than that in the display mode during the execution of the SPSP reach effect. Further, at this time, the display size of the intermediate decorative symbol 41 is larger than the display size of the left and right decorative symbols 41. Further, the small symbol 56 maintains a state in which the three symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1 (7), the display sizes of the three decorative symbols 41 are reduced and temporarily stopped. Further, at this time, all three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in the same display size.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64-1 (8), the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped in a highly decorative display mode.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 41 is stopped as shown in FIG. 64-2 (9). The combination of numbers "666" of the decorative symbol 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, "666" is displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are matched by the combination of "666". At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (10), the opening image 70 is displayed on the image display unit 114. A right-handed image 71 is displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the opening image 70 is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (11), when the jackpot game is started, the image display unit 114 displays the image 72 during the round, the music selection image 73, the number of rounds image 74, and the number of points. The image 75 and the hit image 88 are displayed. In the image 72 during the round, the character that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is lowering his right hand. Further, in the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Further, in the point number image 75, the text "50 pt" is displayed. Further, in the hit image 88, the number "6" is displayed. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (12), the highly accurate fanning effect is started. In the high-accuracy fanning effect, the high-accuracy fanning image 76 is displayed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "150 pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (13), a highly accurate notification effect is performed. In the high-accuracy notification effect, the high-accuracy notification image 77 is displayed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "200 pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (14), the image 72 during the round is displayed again on the image display unit 114. In the image 72 during this round, the character raises his right hand. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display content of the moving image in the image 72 during the round changes from the display content before the execution of the high-accuracy fanning effect (see FIG. 64-2 (11)). Further, at this time, the text "Round 3" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "300 pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (15), in the in-round image 72, what is the character in the in-round image 72 displayed at the time of “Round 3” (see FIG. 64-2 (14))? A different character is lowering his right hand. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display content in the image 72 during the round is further changed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 7" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "610 pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64-2 (16), the character selection image 79 is displayed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 8" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "720pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.
Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the high-accuracy start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 64-3 (17). Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the high-accuracy start image 80 is output from the speaker 156.

Next, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 64-3 (18), the decorative symbol 41 (“666”) having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 displayed at this time corresponds to a sequence of numbers that are finally confirmed and stopped before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "666" like the decorative symbol 41. At this time, the speaker 156 outputs BGM according to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state.

Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 64-3 (19), the decorative symbol 41 starts to fluctuate with the start of the variation display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, the variable pedestal is displayed in a display mode different from that of the low-probability time-saving non-game state (see, for example, FIG. 64-1 (1)). At this time, the speaker 156 outputs BGM according to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state.

In addition, in the variation effect example 3, it was explained that the sound is not output from the speaker 156 when the number "666" which is the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. The BGM may be output from the speaker 156 even when the number "666", which is the decorative symbol 41, is fixedly stopped.

Further, in the variation effect example 3, three decorative symbols 41 with low decorativeness are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 64-1 (7)), and then the decorative symbols 41 with high decorativeness are displayed. Not limited.
For example, after temporarily stopping the three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness, the three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness may be fixedly stopped, and then the jackpot game may be performed. That is, it is not necessary to use the highly decorative decorative symbol 41 to notify that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit.

Further, in the variable production example 3, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game continues to be played from the speaker 156 during the round in the jackpot game, but when one song as the BGM is played during the round, this song is played again from the beginning. It may flow.

(Variable production example 4)
65-1 and 65-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 4) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2.
Note that FIGS. 65-1 and 65-2 are variation effects executed when "ER2" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 58. When "ER2" is selected as the "variable effect pattern", "N1" is executed as the "normal". Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processes and each effect will be mainly described, and the points that match each of the above-mentioned processes and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (1), the effect control unit 300 determines "213", which is the decorative symbol 41, on the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol ends. It has been stopped. At this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, the first variable lamp 133 is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the first special symbol display display 218, the number of reservations is displayed according to the lighting mode corresponding to "4", which is the number of reservations in the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the first holding lamp 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "4", which is the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. At this time, the light emitting unit 137 is turned off. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, three reserved images 52 are displayed. At this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates “3”. At this time, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, the first variable lamp 133 is displayed in a variable manner. Further, at this time, in the first special symbol display display 218, the number of reservations is displayed according to the lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations in the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the first holding lamp 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. At this time, the light emitting unit 137 emits white light. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-1 (3), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped to bring it into the reach state.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 65-1 (4). At this time, the special symbol is turned off on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, the first variable lamp 133, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, and the first hold lamp 135 are turned off. At this time, the light emitting unit 137 is turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156.

Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 4, the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, a command for controlling the power-on at the time of restoration (see FIG. 25-2) is transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65-2 (5), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, in the first special symbol display display 218, the number of reservations is displayed according to the lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations in the first special symbol display 221. On the other hand, the first variable lamp 133 and the first holding lamp 135 are maintained in the extinguished state. Further, the light emitting unit 137 maintains the state of being turned off. Further, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65-2 (6), the first fluctuation lamp 133 is variablely displayed. Further, at this time, the first holding lamp 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. Further, the light emitting unit 137 maintains the state of being turned off. Further, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. After that, until the special symbol stops fluctuating, the image display unit 114, the first special symbol display 221, the first special symbol hold indicator 218, the first fluctuation lamp 133, the first hold lamp 135, the light emitting unit 137, and Each of the speakers 156 maintains these states.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 65-2 (7), the number "315", which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 stops as the special symbol stops changing. At this time, the combination "315" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, three reserved images 52 are displayed. At this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates “3”. Further, at this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 221. In addition, the first variable lamp 133 is stopped and displayed. Further, at this time, in the first special symbol display display 218, the number of reservations is displayed according to the lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of reservations in the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the first holding lamp 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "3", which is the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. Further, the light emitting unit 137 maintains the state of being turned off. Further, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65-2 (8), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, at this time, the second and third reserved images 52 move toward the display position of the variable image 51. Further, at this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, so that the variable image 51 is displayed. At this time, the hold number display 55 of the first starting port 121 indicates “2”. At this time, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 221. At this time, the first variable lamp 133 is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, in the first special symbol display display 218, the number of reservations is displayed according to the lighting mode corresponding to "2", which is the number of reservations in the first special symbol display 221. Further, at this time, the first holding lamp 135 is displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to "2", which is the number of holdings for winning a prize in the first starting port 121. At this time, the light emitting unit 137 emits white light. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display contents in the image display unit 114 from the return to the display of the predetermined image on the image display unit 114 in the case where the first return is performed and the case where the second return is performed. Is different. Here, the first return is, for example, an initialization return. Further, the second return is, for example, a non-initialization return when the hold is stored in the RAM 203. Further, examples of the predetermined image include a decorative symbol 41, a hold number display 55, a small symbol 56, a stage image 61, and the like.
In this case, it is recognized whether the initialization restoration or the non-initialization restoration when the hold occurs is performed before the predetermined image is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the return from the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100, the first return, which is the return when the hold is not stored in the RAM 203, and the return when the hold is stored in the RAM 203. There is a second return. The display content on the image display unit 114 from the return to the display of the predetermined image on the image display unit 114 differs between the case where the first return is performed and the case where the second return is performed.

In this case, for example, when the power is turned off during the game by the player and then the power off state is resolved, the player confirms the display contents on the image display unit 114 until the predetermined image is displayed. This makes it possible to recognize whether or not a hold has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misidentifying that the hold has not occurred even though the hold has occurred.

In addition to the returning image 62, for example, when the power-off state is resolved after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power-off state when the fluctuation effect is being executed and the hold is not generated. , An image consisting of text such as "Hold has not occurred" may be displayed. That is, when the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved when the variation effect is being executed and the hold has not occurred, when the variation effect is not being executed and the hold has not occurred. An image display different from that of the case where the power off state of the pachinko game machine 100 is resolved and the case where the power off state of the pachinko game machine 100 is resolved while the fluctuation effect is being executed and a hold occurs. It may be the display content in the part 114.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns from the power off state when the hold is stored in the RAM 203, the effect control unit 300 holds the hold stored in the RAM 203 when the power is off. After displaying the number of reserved images 52 corresponding to the number on the image display unit 114, the number of reserved images 52 is reduced as the displayed reserved images 52 are moved and displayed.

In this case, the number of held images 52 displayed on the image display unit 114 after the power off state is resolved matches the number of holds recognized by the player as the number of holds immediately before the power off state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the number of holdings when resuming the game after the power off state is resolved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control unit 300 displays the decorative symbol 41 on the image display unit 114 when the pachinko game machine 100 returns from the power off state when the hold is stored in the game control unit 200. Sometimes, the variable image 51 is not displayed, the reserved image 52 is displayed according to the signal transmitted from the game control unit 200, and the variable image 51 is displayed along with the movement display of the displayed reserved image 52. The game control unit 200 is regarded as a main control means for controlling the progress of the game. Further, the effect control unit 300 is regarded as a sub control means for controlling the effect. Further, the variation image 51 is captured as an execution image suggesting the content of information regarding the determination related to the variation display during execution.
In this case, after the power off state is resolved, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the number of holdings, and it becomes easier to understand the start timing of the next fluctuation. Therefore, when the player resumes the game, the game progresses. It is possible to suppress feeling uncomfortable about the condition.

In the variation effect example 4, the light emitting unit 137 is turned off when the non-initialization return is performed and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed (see FIG. 65-2 (7)), but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the light emitting unit 137 may blink when the deinitialization return is performed and the decorative symbol 41 is displayed. That is, the light emitting mode of the light emitting unit 137 may be different between immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and when the non-initialization recovery is performed.

Further, in the variation effect example 4, it has been described that the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed when the non-initialization return is performed after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power off state. , Not limited to this.
For example, when the menu display explanation image 63 is displayed, when a variable effect is being performed, when a jackpot game is being performed, or when a customer waiting effect is being performed, the power supply at the time of restoration A command for controlling the input may be transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300. In this case, the effect control unit 300 may restrict the display of the image being displayed on the image display unit 114 to display the returning image 62.

(Variable production example 5)
66-1 to 66-3 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 5) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66-1 to 66-3.
Note that FIGS. 66-1 to 66-3 are variation effects executed when "ER3" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 58. That is, the variation effect example 5 is the same variation effect as the variation effect example 2 (see FIGS. 63-1 and 63-2). Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 66-1 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the effect control unit 300.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-1 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, the change effect is executed. More specifically, when the change effect is executed, the third reserved image 52 is displayed in blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66-1 (3), the number "351", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. At this time, the chance eye display effect is executed. More specifically, by executing the chance eye display effect, the entire three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in blue.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-1 (4), the change of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the change of the next special symbol.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 66-1 (5).
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 5, the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 66-1 (6), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 66-1 (7), the number "315", which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. At this time, the chance eye display effect is not executed. At this time, two reserved images 52 are displayed. Here, the second reserved image 52, that is, the reserved image 52 (see FIG. 66-1 (4)) displayed in blue immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off is displayed in white. .. At this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66-1 (8), the change of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the change of the next special symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (9), the next fluctuation expectation effect is performed. In the next fluctuation expectation effect, the preview image 82 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (10), the number "412", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. At this time, the chance eye display effect is not executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (11), the change of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the change of the next special symbol. At this time, the change effect is executed. More specifically, the display color of the variable image 51 changes from white to red due to the change effect.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (12), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "4" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the number "4" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped to bring it into the reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (13), the SP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (14), the SPSP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (15), the intermediate decorative symbol 41 temporarily stops at the number “5”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 66-2 (16), three highly decorative decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 66-3 (17), the three decorative symbols 41 are fixedly stopped. The combination "454" of the decorative symbols 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is out of order. In addition, the small symbol 56 also stops as the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. At this time, the combination "454" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off during the display of the hold image 52 whose display mode has changed due to the change effect, and then the non-initialization return is performed, the display mode has changed. The display mode of the reserved image 52 returns to the display mode before the change effect is performed. Further, although the change effect is not performed during the display of the hold image 52, the change effect is performed when the hold image 52 moves and is displayed as the variable image 51.

For example, in the case of performing a notice effect of "changing the display color of the reserved image 52 to blue by the first change effect and changing the display color of the variable image 51 to red by the second change effect", the power is turned off. Information on the display color of the reserved image 52 at the time may not be stored in the RAM 303. In this case, the effect control unit 300 cannot recognize whether the reserved image 52, which is the target of the advance notice effect, is displayed in white or blue immediately before the power off state after the power off state is resolved. Then, for example, if the hold image 52 is displayed in white immediately before the power off state, but the hold image 52 is displayed in blue after the power off state is resolved, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power off state is resolved, the reserved image 52 is displayed in the display mode before the change effect is performed, thereby suppressing the player from giving a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, when the reserved image 52 is moved and displayed as the variable image 51, the advance notice effect is performed based on the information stored in the RAM 303, and the variable image 51 is displayed in red, which should be executed. It suppresses the decline in the player's interest due to the fact that the advance notice production is not performed.
After the power off state is resolved, the change effect for the variable image 51 may not be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off at the stage where the first of the three chance eye display effects is performed, and then the non-initialization return is performed, the second and subsequent times are performed. The next fluctuation expectation effect is performed without the chance eye display effect. That is, if the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off during the execution of the advance notice effect and then the non-initialization return is performed, the advance notice effect that was supposed to be executed is not continued. Then, it is possible to execute a notice effect different from the notice effect that was supposed to be executed.

For example, in the case of performing the advance notice effect of "performing the third chance eye display effect", the RAM 303 may not store the information regarding the number of times the chance eye display effect has been executed when the power is turned off. In this case, the effect control unit 300 cannot recognize the number of times the chance eye display effect has been executed immediately before the power off state after the power off state is resolved. Then, for example, even though the chance eye display effect was performed once immediately before the power off state, if the chance eye display effect is performed three more times after the power off state is resolved, the player feels uncomfortable. There is a risk. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power off state is resolved, the advance notice effect that was supposed to be executed is not continued, thereby suppressing the player from giving a sense of discomfort. Further, by performing a notice effect different from the notice effect that was supposed to be executed based on the information stored in the RAM 303 that "performs the notice effect", the notice effect that was supposed to be executed is not performed. It suppresses the decline in the player's interest due to this.

(Variable production example 6)
67-1 and 67-2 are diagrams showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 6) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67-1 and 67-2.
Note that FIGS. 67-1 and 67-2 are variation effects executed when "EB9" is selected as the "variation effect pattern" in FIG. 57. That is, the variation effect example 6 is the same variation effect as the variation effect example 3 (see FIGS. 64-1 to 64-3). Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 67-1 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the effect control unit 300. At this time, BGM corresponding to the type of the stage image 61 is output from the speaker 156.
Then, as shown in FIG. 67-1 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-1 (3), the reach effect is executed. More specifically, after the number "6" which is the left decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped, the number "6" which is the right decorative symbol 41 is temporarily stopped to bring it into the reach state. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 67-1 (4). At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156.
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 6, the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 67-1 (5), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output. After that, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the special symbol stops fluctuating.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 67-1 (6), the number "222", which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. The combination of numbers "222" of the decorative symbol 41 is an example of a combination when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Further, "222" is displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are matched by the combination of "222". Further, since the timing of the fixed stop is the same for the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56, the time from the start of the display to the fixed stop is the same. At this time, the stage image 61 is displayed. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-1 (7), the opening image 70 and the right-handed image 71 are displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, the BGM corresponding to the opening image 70 is output from the speaker 156.
Next, as shown in FIG. 67-1 (8), when the jackpot game is started, the image display unit 114 displays the image 72 during the round, the music selection image 73, the number of rounds image 74, and the number of points. The image 75 and the hit image 88 are displayed. In the image 72 during the round, the character that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is lowering his right hand. Further, in the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Further, in the point number image 75, the text "50 pt" is displayed. Further, in the hit image 88, the number "2" is displayed. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-2 (9), the highly accurate fanning effect is started. In the high-accuracy fanning effect, the high-accuracy fanning image 76 is displayed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "150 pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 67-2 (10). At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156.
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. That is, non-initialization restoration is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 67-2 (11), the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the returning right-handed image 83 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-2 (12), the right-handed image 71, the round image 72, the round number image 74, and the point number image 75 are displayed on the image display unit 114. At this time, in the image 72 during the round, a character different from the character displayed before the execution of the high-accuracy fanning effect (see FIG. 67-1 (8)) is lowering his right hand. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display content of the moving image in the image 72 during the round changes from the display content before the execution of the high-accuracy fanning effect. Further, at this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "200 pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. At this time, the high-accuracy notification effect is not executed. At this time, the speaker 156 outputs BGM corresponding to the jackpot game from the beginning. That is, the content of the BGM that was flowing at the start of the jackpot game (see FIG. 67-1 (8)) is output again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67-2 (13), in the in-round image 72, the character in the in-round image 72 (see FIG. 67-2 (12)) displayed at the time of “Round 2” is the right hand. Is listed. That is, as the jackpot game progresses, the display content in the image 72 during the round changes. Further, at this time, the text "Round 8" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "750pt" is displayed in the point number image 75. In this jackpot game, the character selection image 79 is not displayed. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the speaker 156.
Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the high-accuracy start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 67-2 (14). Further, at this time, the BGM corresponding to the high-accuracy start image 80 is output from the speaker 156.

Next, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 67-2 (15), the decorative symbol 41 (“315”) having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 displayed at this time is a sequence of numbers "222" (FIG. 67-1 (6)) that was finally confirmed and stopped before the jackpot game was executed, that is, when the jackpot was won. See) is a different sequence. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "315" like the decorative symbol 41. At this time, the speaker 156 outputs BGM according to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 67-2 (16), the decorative symbol 41 starts to fluctuate with the start of the variation display of the special symbol. At this time, the speaker 156 outputs BGM according to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 does not turn off during the execution of the variation effect determined to perform the jackpot game, the effect control unit 300 next changes in the variation effect being executed. The decorative symbol 41 for starting the effect is displayed in a sequence of predetermined symbols, and is being executed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns after the power is turned off during the execution of the variable effect determined to perform a special game. The decorative symbol 41, which starts the next variation effect of the variation effect of the above, includes and displays different symbols.

For example, in the power off state, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the RAM 303 may not store information on which combination the numbers of the decorative symbols 41 are to be displayed. Further, the types of jackpot symbols (see FIG. 21) included in the fluctuation start command transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 do not correspond to all types of the decorative symbols 41. Therefore, the effect control unit 300 cannot recognize which combination is used to display the number of the decorative symbol 41 before the power off state when the power off state is resolved. Then, in this case, at the start of the "next fluctuation" of the fluctuation in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, for example, a number different from the combination of the decorative symbols 41 that was intended to be displayed before the power off state. If the decorative symbols 41 are displayed side by side, the player may mistakenly think that he has won the jackpot in this "next fluctuation". Therefore, at the start of this "next fluctuation", by displaying three decorative symbols 41 in a line including different symbols, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the jackpot was won in the "next fluctuation". , It suppresses the player from feeling uncomfortable when resuming the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not turned off during the execution of the jackpot game, the effect control unit 300 displays a special effect image on the image display unit 114 during the execution of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is executed. When the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns after the power is turned off during the execution of the game, an image different from the special production image is displayed without displaying the special production image during the execution of the jackpot game. Examples of the special effect image include a round image 72, a music selection image 73, a round number image 74, a point number image 75, a high-accuracy fanning image 76, a high-accuracy notification image 77, a character selection image 79, and a high-accuracy start image 80. , The hit image 88 and the like.

For example, when a power off state occurs during the execution of the jackpot game, the RAM 303 may not store information on the progress of the effect in the jackpot game when the power is off. Therefore, the effect control unit 300 cannot recognize the progress of the effect during the jackpot game when the power off state is resolved. Then, in this case, if the effect image that should have been displayed when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is not turned off is displayed when it is not suitable for the progress of the effect during the jackpot game, the player feels uncomfortable. May give. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power off state is resolved, the pachinko gaming machine 100 does not display the effect image that should have been displayed when the power off state does not occur, so that the player restarts the game. It suppresses the feeling of strangeness.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 returns after the power is turned off during the execution of the variation effect when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be performed, the effect control unit 300 is performing the variation effect during execution. The variable effect being executed is terminated without temporarily stopping the decorative symbol 41 according to the above.

If the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power-off state during the execution of the game by the player, the effect is temporarily interrupted. Therefore, even after the power-off state is resolved, the effect related to the fluctuation that was performed immediately before the power-off state is performed. This makes it easier for the player to feel uncomfortable with the production. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power-off state is resolved, the player can play the game by limiting the pseudo-effect using the decorative symbol 41 related to the fluctuation that was performed immediately before the power-off state. It suppresses the feeling of strangeness when resuming.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the jackpot game, the round number image 74 and the point number image 75 are displayed. Further, the display content in the round number image 74 at this time corresponds to the progress of the jackpot game. Further, the display content in the point number image 75 corresponds to the number of prize balls due to the game ball winning in the large prize opening 125.

In the present embodiment, each time a round in the jackpot game progresses, information regarding the progress of the round is stored in the RAM 303. Further, each time a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 125, information regarding the number of prize balls due to the winning is stored in the RAM 303. Therefore, even when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power-off state, after the power-off state is resolved, the effect control unit 300 has the number of rounds image 74 and the number of points based on the information stored in the RAM 303. The image 75 is displayed in a display mode according to the situation of the jackpot game. In this case, even when the power off state occurs, the player can be made to recognize the situation of the jackpot game after the power off state is resolved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the power is turned off. The previously displayed stage image 61 is displayed again, but no sound is output from the speaker 156 at this time.

If a sound is output after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the player may feel that a warning sound has been output, which may cause anxiety to the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by displaying the stage image 61 when the power off state is resolved, the player is made to recognize that the display content on the image display unit 114 has returned to the state before the power off state, and the power is supplied. It suppresses giving the player anxiety that a disconnection has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the jackpot game, before the decorative symbol 41, the stage image 61, etc. are displayed, that is, , Before returning from the power off state, the player is urged to play the game.

When the power off state is resolved, the game control unit 200 may start controlling the jackpot game before the effect control unit 300 starts the effect. In this case, if the player does not restart the game even though the jackpot game is being performed, the player may be disadvantaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the power off state is resolved, the player is disadvantaged by encouraging the player to play the game before the effect that was performed before the power off state is restored. Is suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the jackpot game, the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game is output from the beginning. In this case, the player can recognize that the jackpot game is being performed by listening to the BGM output after the power off state is resolved.

It is not necessary to output the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game from the beginning after the power off state is resolved. For example, every time the power is cut off after the power is cut off, the music may be output from a predetermined location in the BGM, such as a rust of a musical piece. That is, it suffices if the BGM is output from the same place each time the power off state occurs and then disappears.

(Modification example of variation effect example 6)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a modified example of the variation effect example 6.
In Example 6 of the variable effect, the effect performed when the power off state occurs and the power off state is resolved during the variable effect is described, but the effect performed when the power off state is resolved is not limited to these. ..
Hereinafter, a modified example of the variation effect example 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 68. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, in this modified example, the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 67-1 (1) to 67-1 (5) in the variable effect example 6 is performed. That is, after the variation of the special symbol is started and the reach state is reached, the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off and the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68 (1), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156. After that, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the special symbol stops fluctuating.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 68 (2), the number "315", which is the three highly decorative decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. Further, "315" is displayed as the small symbol 56. That is, the display of the decorative symbol 41 and the small symbol 56 are matched by the combination of "315". Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Then, at the start of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 68 (3), the jackpot notification image 84, the game start notification image 85, the game execution instruction image 86, and the right-handed hit on the image display unit 114. The instruction image 87 is displayed. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 outputs the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game and the BGM corresponding to the jackpot notification image 84. That is, the BGM output from the speaker 156 at this time is different from the BGM output in the jackpot game (see FIG. 64-2 (11)) performed after the fluctuation in which the power off state does not occur.
In this jackpot game, none of the opening image 70, the round image 72, the music selection image 73, the round number image 74, the point number image 75, the character selection image 79, and the high accuracy start image 80 are displayed. .. Further, in this jackpot game, the high-accuracy fanning effect and the high-accuracy notification effect are not performed.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off during the execution of the jackpot game, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 68 (4). At this time, no sound is output from the speaker 156.
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. In this case, as shown in FIG. 68 (5), the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the returning right-handed image 83 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the speaker 156 maintains a state in which no sound is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (6), the jackpot notification image 84, the game start notification image 85, the game execution instruction image 86, and the right-handed instruction image 87 are displayed on the image display unit 114. .. At this time, the speaker 156 outputs the BGM corresponding to the jackpot game and the BGM corresponding to the jackpot notification image 84 from the beginning. That is, the content of the BGM that was output at the start of the jackpot game (see FIG. 68 (3)) is output again. After that, the image display unit 114 and the speaker 156 maintain these states until the jackpot game is completed. Even in this case, the prize balls are paid out according to the winning of the big winning opening 125 during the big hit game.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 68 (7), the decorative symbol 41 (“315”) having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped on the image display unit 114. The decorative symbol 41 displayed at this time corresponds to a sequence of numbers that are finally confirmed and stopped before the jackpot game is executed, that is, when the jackpot is won. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "315" like the decorative symbol 41. At this time, the speaker 156 outputs BGM according to the stage in the high-probability time-saving game state.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 68 (8), the decorative symbol 41 starts to fluctuate with the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

As described above, in this modified example, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, this special symbol is used. When the fluctuation is stopped, three decorative symbols 41 are displayed in a line including different symbols.

For example, in the power off state, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the RAM 303 may not store information on which combination the numbers of the decorative symbols 41 are to be displayed. Further, the types of jackpot symbols (see FIG. 21) included in the fluctuation start command transmitted from the game control unit 200 to the effect control unit 300 do not correspond to all types of the decorative symbols 41. Therefore, the effect control unit 300 cannot recognize which combination is used to display the number of the decorative symbol 41 before the power off state when the power off state is resolved. Then, in this case, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit and the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, for example, the number arrangement is different from the combination of the decorative symbols 41 that was intended to be displayed before the power off state. When the decorative symbol 41 is displayed, the player may mistakenly think that the lottery result of the special symbol lottery has won the jackpot in a "variation different" from the variation of the special symbol which is the jackpot. Therefore, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, three decorative symbols 41 including different symbols are displayed to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the jackpot was won in the "different variation".

Further, in this modified example, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the execution of the variable effect in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the big-hit game is being executed. An image that is not displayed when the power off state does not occur, such as a jackpot notification image 84, a game start notification image 85, a game execution instruction image 86, and a right-handed instruction image 87, is displayed.

In the jackpot game, the lottery result of the special symbol lottery may be a jackpot, and the effect corresponding to the type of the decorative symbol 41 prepared by the variation effect related to the variation of the special symbol may be performed. Therefore, if the effect control unit 300 cannot recognize which combination the decorative symbol 41 is intended to be displayed when the power off state is resolved, it may not be able to recognize the type of effect to be performed in the subsequent jackpot game. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the jackpot game after the power-off state is resolved, the jackpot after the power-off state occurs by displaying an image different from the case where the power-off state does not occur. It suppresses giving a sense of discomfort to the player in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as in the variation effect example 6 and the modified example, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is in the power-off state and the power-off state is resolved during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the special symbol is changed. The time for displaying the three decorative symbols 41 is shorter than that in the case where the power off state does not occur. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player who sees the three decorative symbols 41 displayed after the power off state is resolved from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in the variation effect example 6 and the modification example, the big hit game may be performed without displaying the three decorative symbols 41 after the power off state is resolved. Shortening the time for displaying the three decorative symbols 41 also includes not displaying the three decorative symbols 41 (0 seconds). Further, in this case, the small symbol 56 may be stopped. That is, after the power off state is resolved, the three decorative symbols 41 may not be displayed, while the small symbol 56 may be displayed before the jackpot game is performed.

Further, in the modified example, it has been explained that in the jackpot game, a BGM different from the BGM output in the jackpot game (see FIG. 64-2 (11)) performed after the fluctuation in which the power off state does not occur is output. , Not limited to this. That is, the same BGM may be output in the big hit game regardless of whether or not the power is cut off during the change of the special symbol in which the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or in the big hit game.

Further, in the variation effect example 6 and the modified example, the decorative symbol 41 that is fixedly stopped after the power off state is resolved is a highly decorative decorative symbol 41, but the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, after the power off state is resolved, the three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness as shown in FIG. 64-1 (7) may be fixedly stopped, and then the jackpot game may be performed. Even in this case, the decorative symbol 41 is not temporarily stopped after the power off state is resolved.

(Modification example 1 of the production in the jackpot game)
69-1 and 69-2 are effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like, and are diagrams showing a modified example of the effect in the jackpot game.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 69-1 and 69-2, a modified example (modified example 1) will be described with respect to the effect in the jackpot game. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 69-1 (1), the image display unit 114 has a right-handed image 71, a round image 72, a music selection image 73, a round number image 74, and a point. The number image 75 and the hit image 88 are displayed. In the image 72 during the round, the character that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is lowering his right hand. Further, in the round number image 74, the text "Round 1" is displayed. Further, in the point number image 75, the text "50 pt" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69-1 (2), the highly accurate fanning effect is started. In the high-accuracy fanning effect, the high-accuracy fanning image 76 is displayed. Further, at this time, the text "Round 2" is displayed in the round number image 74. Further, at this time, the text "150 pt" is displayed in the point number image 75.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 69-1 (3).
Then, when the power off state is resolved in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. 69-1 (4), the image display unit 114 shows the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the game continuation instruction image 81. The right-handed image 83 is displayed during the return.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69-1 (5), the right-handed image 71, the round image 72, the music selection image 73, the point number image 75, and the hit image 88 are displayed on the image display unit 114. To. On the other hand, the round number image 74 is not displayed. At this time, in the image 72 during the round, the character that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is lowering his right hand. That is, the display content in the image 72 during the round is the display content when the jackpot game is started (see FIG. 69-1 (1)). Further, at this time, the text "0pt" is displayed on the point number image 75. For example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 125 after this, the number of prize balls due to the winning is displayed on the point number image 75. That is, in the point number image 75, the number of prize balls after returning from the power off state is displayed. At this time, the character "?" Is displayed in the hit image 88.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 69-1 (6).
Then, when the power off state is resolved in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. 69-1 (7), the image display unit 114 shows the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the game continuation instruction image 81. The right-handed image 83 is displayed during the return.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69-1 (8), the right-handed image 71, the round image 72, the music selection image 73, the point number image 75, and the hit image 88 are displayed on the image display unit 114. To. At this time, in the image 72 during the round, the character that is the subject of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is lowering his right hand. That is, the display content in the image 72 during the round is the display content when the jackpot game is started (see FIG. 69-1 (1)). Further, at this time, the text "0pt" is displayed on the point number image 75.
Then, when the jackpot game is completed, the high-accuracy start image 80 is displayed as shown in FIG. 69-2 (9).

Next, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 69-2 (10), the decorative symbol 41 (“315”) having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "315" like the decorative symbol 41.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 69-2 (11), the decorative symbol 41 starts to fluctuate with the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

As described above, in the first modification, if the power off state occurs and the power off state is resolved during the execution of the jackpot game, the round number image 74 is not displayed thereafter. In this case, when the power off state is resolved, the player misidentifies the progress of the jackpot game by displaying the round number image 74 even though the effect control unit 300 does not recognize the progress of the jackpot game. Can be suppressed.

(Modification example 2 of the production in the jackpot game)
70-1 and 70-2 are effects performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 and the like, and are diagrams showing other modified examples of the effects in the jackpot game.
Next, with reference to FIGS. 70-1 and 70-2, another modification (modification example 2) will be described with respect to the effect in the jackpot game. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, when the jackpot game is started, as shown in FIG. 70-1 (1), the image display unit 114 has a right-handed image 71, a round image 72, a music selection image 73, a round number image 74, and a point. The number image 75 and the hit image 88 are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70-1 (2), the highly accurate fanning effect is started. In the high-accuracy fanning effect, the high-accuracy fanning image 76 is displayed.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 70-1 (3).
Then, when the power off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. 70-1 (4), the image display unit 114 shows the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the game continuation instruction image 81. The right-handed image 83 is displayed during the return.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70-1 (5), the jackpot notification image 84, the game start notification image 85, the game execution instruction image 86, and the right-handed instruction image 87 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Will be done. The round number image 74, the point number image 75, the hit image 88, and the like are not displayed.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 70-1 (6).
Then, when the power off state is resolved in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. 70-1 (7), the image display unit 114 shows the returning image 62, the game continuation instruction image 81, and the game continuation instruction image 81. The right-handed image 83 is displayed during the return.
Next, as shown in FIG. 70-1 (8), the jackpot notification image 84, the game start notification image 85, the game execution instruction image 86, and the right-handed instruction image 87 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Will be done.

Then, when the jackpot game is completed, in the high-probability time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 70-2 (9), the decorative symbol 41 (“315”) having low decorativeness is fixedly stopped on the image display unit 114. ing. Then, the small symbol 56 is also fixedly stopped by the arrangement of the numbers of "315" like the decorative symbol 41.
Then, for example, when the game ball wins the second starting port 122, as shown in FIG. 70-2 (10), the decorative symbol 41 starts to fluctuate with the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

(Non-initialization test operation processing when the movable accessory malfunctions)
71-1 and 71-2 are diagrams showing an example of a non-initialization test operation process when a malfunction of the movable accessory 115 occurs.
Next, an example of the non-initialization test operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 71-1 and 71-2. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 71-1 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped in the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the effect control unit 300.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71-1 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71-1 (3), the reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71-1 (4), the SP reach effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 71-1 (5), the SPSP reach effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71-1 (6), an operation effect is performed. In the operation effect, the button operation image 89 is displayed.
Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 89 is displayed, the accessory operation effect is performed as shown in FIG. 71-1 (7). In the accessory movement effect, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C each operate so as to cover a part of the image display unit 114.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 71-1 (8). At this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C stop operating with a part of the image display unit 114 covered.

Next, when the power off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. 71-2 (9), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Is displayed. Further, at this time, the left movable accessory 115A and the middle movable accessory 115B return to the positions before the accessory movement effect is performed. On the other hand, in the right movable accessory 115C, a malfunction has occurred, and the position does not return to the position before the accessory operation effect was performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71-2 (10), the non-initialization test operation process is performed. In the non-initialization test operation process, the left movable accessory 115A and the middle movable accessory 115B each operate so as to cover a part of the image display unit 114. On the other hand, the right movable accessory 115C maintains a non-operating state.
Then, as shown in FIG. 71-2 (11), the non-initialization test operation process by the left movable accessory 115A and the middle movable accessory 115B is completed. On the other hand, in the right movable accessory 115C, the state of covering a part of the image display unit 114 is maintained. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the number of reserved symbols 55, and the small symbol 56 are displayed.

(Modification example 1 of non-initialization test operation processing)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a modified example of the non-initialization test operation process when the movable accessory 115 malfunctions.
Next, another example (modification example 1) of the non-initialization test operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 72. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, in this modified example, the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 71-1 (1) to 71-1 (5) is performed. That is, the variation of the special symbol is started, and the reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect are performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (1), an operation effect is performed. In the operation effect, the button operation image 89 is displayed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 161 while the button operation image 89 is displayed, the accessory operation effect is performed as shown in FIG. 72 (2). In this accessory movement effect, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C move to the front side of the image display unit 114.
Subsequently, in the accessory movement effect, as shown in FIG. 72 (3), the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C move to the right, respectively.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 72 (4). At this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C stop operating with a part of the image display unit 114 covered.

Then, when the power off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. 72 (5), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114. .. Further, at this time, the middle movable accessory 115B and the right movable accessory 115C return to the positions before the accessory operation effect is performed. On the other hand, in the left movable accessory 115A, a malfunction has occurred, and the position does not return to the position before the accessory operation effect was performed. The position of the left movable accessory 115A at this time is the position where the left movable accessory 115A and the middle movable accessory 115B come into contact with each other when the middle movable accessory 115B performs an operation by the non-initialization test operation process. is there.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 72 (6), none of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C is operated by the non-initialization test operation process. Further, in the left movable accessory 115A, the state of covering a part of the image display unit 114 is maintained. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the number of reserved symbols 55, and the small symbol 56 are displayed.

As described above, in the modified example 1, when the power off state occurs during the operation of the movable accessory 115 (when the movable accessory 115 is abnormal), the abnormality of the movable accessory 115 continues even after the power off state is resolved. When the non-initialization test operation process is performed, if one movable accessory 115 and another movable accessory 115 come into contact with each other, the operation of any movable accessory 115 is restricted.
In this case, it is possible to suppress secondary damage caused by contact between one movable accessory 115 and the other movable accessory 115 by performing a non-initialization test operation process after the power off state is resolved. it can.

(Modification example 2 of non-initialization test operation processing)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing another modification of the non-initialization test operation process when the movable accessory 115 malfunctions.
Next, another example (modification example 2) of the non-initialization test operation process will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, in this modified example, the same effect as described with reference to FIGS. 72 (1) to 72 (3) is performed. That is, the variation of the special symbol is started, and then the accessory movement effect is performed. Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 73 (1). At this time, the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C stop operating with a part of the image display unit 114 covered.

Then, when the power off state is resolved while the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, as shown in FIG. 73 (2), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114. .. Further, at this time, the middle movable accessory 115B and the right movable accessory 115C return to the positions before the accessory operation effect is performed. On the other hand, in the left movable accessory 115A, a malfunction has occurred, and the position does not return to the position before the accessory operation effect was performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (3), the non-initialization test operation process is performed. In this case, the middle movable accessory 115B and the right movable accessory 115C each operate so as to cover a part of the image display unit 114. On the other hand, the left movable accessory 115A does not perform the operation by the non-initialization test operation process. Further, at this time, the contact of the middle movable accessory 115B with the left movable accessory 115A prevents the operation of the medium movable accessory 115B by the non-initialization test operation process.

Then, as shown in FIG. 73 (4), the non-initialization test operation process by the middle movable accessory 115B and the right movable accessory 115C is completed. On the other hand, in the left movable accessory 115A, the state of covering a part of the image display unit 114 is maintained. At this time, the decorative symbol 41, the number of reserved symbols 55, and the small symbol 56 are displayed.

As described above, in the modified example 2, when the power supply off state occurs during the operation of the movable accessory 115 (when the movable accessory 115 is abnormal), the abnormality of the movable accessory 115 continues even after the power off state is resolved. Therefore, even when one movable accessory 115 and another movable accessory 115 come into contact with each other when performing the non-initialization test operation process, the movable accessory 115 located at the initial position is not affected. Perform the operation by the initialization test process.
In this case, when the other movable accessory 115 comes into contact with the one movable accessory 115 whose abnormality is continuing, the abnormality of the one movable accessory 115 whose abnormality is continuing may be resolved. is there.

In the above, an operation example when the non-initialization test operation process is performed has been described with reference to FIGS. 71-1, 71-2, 72, and 73, but the operation is not limited to this, and the initial stage Even when the chemical test operation process is performed, the same operation as the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 71-1, 71-2, 72, and 73 may be performed.

In the operation example of the non-initialization test operation process, if the movable accessory 115 malfunctions after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the speaker 156 warns that the malfunction has occurred. The image display unit 114 may display a warning image indicating that a malfunction has occurred.

(Variable production example 7)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing one aspect of the effect performed by the effect control unit 300 using the image display unit 114 or the like.
Next, another specific example (variation effect example 7) of the variation effect of the decorative symbol 41 will be described with reference to FIG. 74.
The variation effect shown in FIG. 74 is a variation effect executed in the high-probability time-saving gaming state. Further, in the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 74 (1), the effect control unit 300 terminates the variation of the previous special symbol, and the image display unit 114 definitely stops the decorative symbol 41 having low decorativeness. There is.
Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (2), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol.

Then, when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off, the image display unit 114 is turned off as shown in FIG. 74 (3).
Then, in the state where the RAM clear switch 228 is OFF, the power off state of the pachinko gaming machine 100 is resolved. That is, in the variation effect example 7, the non-initialization return is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 74 (4), the returning image 62 and the game continuation instruction image 81 are displayed on the image display unit 114. Further, at this time, the background on the display screen of the image display unit 114 is a case where the non-initialization return is performed after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off during the fluctuation production of the low-probability time-saving non-game state (FIG. 67). It is displayed in a different color from -1 (see (5)). In the illustrated example, the background color on the display screen of the image display unit 114 is displayed in blue. Further, at this time, the right-handed image 83 during the return is displayed on the image display unit 114.

Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, as shown in FIG. 74 (5), the number "315", which is the three decorative symbols 41 having low decorativeness, is fixedly stopped. In addition, the small symbol 56 stops as the special symbol stops changing. At this time, the combination "315" of the small symbols 56 matches the combination of the decorative symbols 41. At this time, one reserved image 52 is displayed. At this time, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122 indicates "1". Further, at this time, the variable image 51 is not displayed on the image display unit 114.

Then, as shown in FIG. 74 (6), the variation of the decorative symbol 41 is started with the start of the variation display of the next special symbol. Further, at this time, the first reserved image 52 moves to the display position of the variable image 51, so that the variable image 51 is displayed. At this time, the hold number display 55 of the second starting port 122 indicates "0".

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display content of the image display unit 114 is different between the low-probability time-saving non-game state and the high-probability time-saving game state when the non-initialization return is performed.
In addition, in the variation effect example 7, it has been explained that when the non-initialization return is performed, the returning right-handed image 83 (see FIG. 74 (4)) is displayed together with the returning image 62, but the present invention is limited to this. Not done. As an image displayed together with the returning image 62, for example, a right-handed image 71 (see FIG. 74 (5)) may be displayed.

(Event when the signal line is not connected)
FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating an event when the signal line is not connected.
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, an event when the signal line connecting the two functional units is not connected will be described. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped on the screen of the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the effect control unit 300. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156. Further, at this time, the game control board and the fraud detection control board are connected by a signal line. More specifically, the game control board and the fraud detection control board are connected by a signal line via a connector.

The fraud detection control board is a board that controls the detection of fraud in the game by the player. A radio wave detecting means, a magnetic detecting means, and a vibration detecting means are connected to the fraud detection control board.
The radio wave detecting means detects an abnormal radio wave. For example, when the radio wave detecting means detects a radio wave having a power density equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the radio wave detecting means notifies the game control board via a signal line that an abnormal radio wave has been detected.
The magnetic detector means detects anomalous magnetism. For example, when the magnetic detection means detects a magnetism having a magnetic flux density equal to or higher than a predetermined value, it notifies the game control board that an abnormal magnetism has been detected via a signal line.
The vibration detecting means detects abnormal vibration. For example, when the vibration detecting means detects a vibration having an acceleration equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the vibration detecting means notifies the game control board via a signal line that the abnormal vibration has been detected.

When the game control unit 200 configured on the game control board receives a notification regarding an abnormality from the fraud detection control board, it notifies an error according to the type of the received notification.
Further, the game control board is provided with a connection detection sensor. The connection detection sensor is a sensor that detects the presence or absence of a connection between the game control board and the fraud detection control board.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (2), the decorative symbol 41 starts to fluctuate with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (3), the connector connecting the game control board and the fraud detection control board is disconnected, so that the game control board and the fraud detection control board are not connected. In this case, the connection detection sensor provided on the game control board detects the non-connection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the fraud detection control board. Then, when the non-connection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the fraud detection control board is detected, the game control unit 200 displays the radio wave error notification image 90 and the magnetic error notification image 91 on the image display unit 114. , The vibration error notification image 92 is displayed. Further, the speaker 156 ends the output of the BGM according to the fluctuation effect, and outputs a notification sound that a radio wave error has occurred, a notification sound that a magnetic error has occurred, and a notification sound that a vibration error has occurred. Let me.

The radio wave error notification image 90 is an image that notifies or suggests that a radio wave error has occurred. The radio wave error notification image 90 is an image displayed when the game control unit 200 receives a notification of detection of an abnormal radio wave from the radio wave detecting means.
The magnetic error notification image 91 is an image that notifies or suggests that a magnetic error has occurred. The magnetic error notification image 91 is an image displayed when the game control unit 200 receives a notification of detection of abnormal magnetism from the magnetic detection means.
The vibration error notification image 92 is an image that notifies or suggests that a vibration error has occurred. The vibration error notification image 92 is an image displayed when the game control unit 200 receives a notification of detection of abnormal vibration from the vibration detecting means.

After that, when the game control board and the fraud detection control board are reconnected by connecting the connector to the signal line, the radio wave error notification image 90, the magnetic error notification image 91, and the vibration error notification are notified. The image 92 may be hidden, the error notification sound may not be output, and the decorative symbol 41 or the like may be displayed again. Further, even when the game control board and the fraud detection control board are reconnected, the radio error notification image 90, the magnetic error notification image 91, and the vibration error notification image 92 are displayed, and the error notification sound is output. May be continued.

(Event 2 when the signal line is not connected)
FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating an event when the signal line is not connected.
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, an event (event 2) when the signal line connecting the two functional units is not connected will be described. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 76 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped on the screen of the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the effect control unit 300. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156. Further, at this time, the game control board and the effect control board are connected by a signal line. More specifically, the game control board and the effect control board are connected by a signal line via a connector.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (2), the decorative symbol 41 starts to fluctuate with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (3), the connector connecting the game control board and the effect control board is disconnected, so that the game control board and the effect control board are not connected. Even in this case, the display of the decorative symbol 41 is continued on the image display unit 114. More specifically, the three decorative symbols 41 are temporarily stopped. Further, at this time, notification regarding various errors is not performed. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (4), the game control board and the effect control board are reconnected by connecting the connector to the signal line. Even in this case, notification of various errors is not performed. Then, as the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the number "421", which is the three decorative symbols 41, is fixedly stopped. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect is output from the speaker 156.

(Event 3 when the signal line is not connected)
FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating an event when the signal line is not connected.
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, an event (event 3) when the signal line connecting the two functional units is not connected will be described. In the following description, the points different from each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect will be mainly described, and the description of the points that match each of the above-mentioned processing examples and each effect may be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77 (1), the decorative symbol 41 is fixedly stopped on the screen of the image display unit 114 as the variation of the previous special symbol is completed by the effect control unit 300. At this time, BGM is output from the speaker 156. At this time, the game control board and the switch are connected by a signal line. More specifically, the game control board and the switch are connected by a signal line via a connector. This switch may be, for example, the first start port switch 211. Further, the switch may be the second start port switch 122 or the gate switch 214.
Further, the game control board is provided with a connection detection sensor. The connection detection sensor is a sensor that detects the presence or absence of a connection between the game control board and the switch.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (2), the decorative symbol 41 starts to fluctuate with the start of the next variable display of the special symbol. Further, at this time, BGM corresponding to the fluctuation effect is output from the speaker 156.

Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (3), the connector connecting the game control board and the switch is disconnected, so that the game control board and the switch are not connected. In this case, the connection detection sensor provided on the game control board detects the disconnection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the switch. Then, when it is detected that the signal line connecting the game control board and the switch is not connected, the game control unit 200 causes the image display unit 114 to display the disconnection error notification image 93. Further, the speaker 156 ends the output of the BGM according to the fluctuation effect, and outputs a notification sound indicating that a disconnection error has occurred.
The disconnection error notification image 93 is an image that notifies or suggests that an error related to the non-connection of the signal line has occurred.

After that, when the game control board and the switch are reconnected by connecting the connector to the signal line, the disconnection error notification image 93 is hidden and the disconnection error notification sound is output. It disappears, and the decorative symbol 41 and the like may be displayed again. Further, even when the game control board and the switch are reconnected, the display of the disconnection error notification image 93 and the output of the disconnection error notification sound may be continued.
Further, the image displayed when the non-connection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the switch is detected is not limited to the disconnection error notification image 93. When it is detected that the signal line connecting the game control board and the first start port switch 211 is not connected, an image notifying the error of the first start port switch 211 may be displayed. That is, depending on the type of switch, an image notifying the error of the switch in which unconnected is detected may be displayed. In other words, when a non-connection of the signal line connecting the game control board and the switch is detected, at least one of a connection error and a connection destination error may be notified.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the disconnection of the predetermined signal line connected to the game control means is detected during the output of the predetermined effect sound, the output sound is terminated and the predetermined notification is given. Sound can be output.
In this case, even during the output of the predetermined production sound, the predetermined notification sound can be notified in preference to the production sound.

In the event described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77, the case where the decorative symbol 41 is changing has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, when the signal line connecting the two functional units is not connected even during the customer waiting effect or the jackpot game is being executed, it is the same as the event described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. An event may occur.

Further, although the description is omitted, in each variation effect example and its modification, and in the operation example and its modification in the non-initialization return processing, after the power off state is resolved, FIGS. 59-1 and 59-2, The non-initialization restoration process and the non-initialization test operation process described with reference to FIGS. 71-1, 71-2, 72, and 73 may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which light is emitted as a normal light emitting mode has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the normal light emitting mode may be a non-light emitting mode. That is, the normal light emitting mode includes a mode that does not emit light.

Further, the movable accessory 115 may be provided on the frame member 150 or on the game board 110. That is, the movable accessory 115 can be regarded as a first light emitting unit capable of emitting light and also as a second light emitting unit capable of emitting light.

Although various effects of the pachinko gaming machine 100 have been described above, it is possible to apply or combine all or part of the described contents to other effects, controls, etc., even if there is no particular mention. In addition, various processing examples, variation effect examples, and modification examples have been mentioned, but application or combination of the contents of such processing examples, variation effect examples, and modification examples to other effects is not mentioned in this document. It is possible even in some cases. Further, it is possible to combine various processing examples, variation effect examples, and modification examples, or to replace some of them even if not mentioned in this document.

[Technical Features of the Present Invention]
The first configuration that achieves the above object of the present invention is realized as the following gaming machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing information about the game and an effect control means (for example, frame lamp 157) for operating the effect (for example, a frame lamp 157). A gaming machine including an effect control unit 300), and for returning from the power off state of the gaming machine (for example, the state of FIG. 59-1 (2)), the storage means (for example, RAM 203) is used. The first return with initialization of the stored information (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 60-2 (5)) and the second return without the initialization (for example, of FIG. 59-2 (5)). There is a non-initialization return), and when the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) performs the first return (for example, the initialization return in FIG. 60-2 (5)), the second The effect means (for example, frame lamp 157) by an operation mode different from the case where the return (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 59-2 (5)) is performed (for example, the light emitting mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)). ) Is activated.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has returned from the power off state.

◆ The second configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following game machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a storage means for storing information about the game (for example, RAM 203), an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, an effect button 161), and a movable accessory that can be operated. A gaming machine including an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for operating (for example, a movable accessory 115), wherein the power of the game machine is turned off (for example, FIG. 59-1 (2)). The return from the state) includes a first return (for example, initialization return in FIG. 60-2 (5)) accompanied by initialization of information stored in the storage means (for example, RAM 203) and the initialization. There is a second return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 59-2 (5)) without the above, and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) is the first return (for example, FIG. 60-). When the initialization return of 2 (5) is performed, the operation means (for example, the effect button 161) and the movable accessory (for example, the movable accessory 115) are returned to the second return (for example, FIG. 59-2). It is operated by a special operation mode (for example, the operation mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)) different from the case where the non-initialization return of (5) is performed, and the operation mode of the operation means (for example, the effect button 161) is operated. When changing from the special operating mode (for example, the operating mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)) to the normal operating mode (for example, the operating mode of FIG. 60-2 (8)), the movable accessory (for example, movable) The operation mode of the accessory 115) is also characterized by changing from the special operation mode (for example, the operation mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)) to the normal operation mode (for example, the operation mode of FIG. 60-2 (8)). To do.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has returned from the power off state.

◆ The third configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a game frame (for example, a frame member 150) having a first light emitting unit (for example, a frame lamp 157) capable of emitting light, and a second light emitting unit (for example, for example) capable of emitting light. A game machine including a game board (for example, a game board 110) having a board lamp 116) and forming a game area (for example, a game area 111), and a storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing information about the game. The first method of returning from the power off state of the gaming machine (for example, the state of FIG. 59-1 (2)) involves initialization of the information stored in the storage means (for example, RAM 203). There are a return (for example, the initialization return in FIG. 60-2 (5)) and a second return without the initialization (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 59-2 (5)). When the return (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 60-2 (5)) is performed, the first light emitting unit (for example, the frame lamp 157) and the second light emitting unit (for example, the panel lamp 116) are subjected to the first light emitting unit. It emits light by a special light emitting mode (for example, the light emitting mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)) different from the case where the 2 return (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 59-2 (5)) is performed, and the first light emission is described. When the light emitting mode of the unit (for example, the frame lamp 157) changes from the special light emitting mode (for example, the light emitting mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)) to the normal light emitting mode (light emitting mode of FIG. 60-2 (8)). The light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit (for example, the panel lamp 116) also changes from the special light emitting mode (for example, the light emitting mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)) to the normal light emitting mode (light emitting mode of FIG. 60-2 (8)). ) Is changed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has returned from the power off state.

◆ The fourth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing information about the game, and a plurality of movable movable parts (for example, left movable accessory 115A, middle movable accessory 115B, etc.). A gaming machine provided with an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for operating the right movable accessory 115C), and the power of the game machine is turned off (for example, the state shown in FIG. 59-1 (2)). The recovery from is accompanied by the first return (for example, the initialization return in FIG. 60-2 (5)) accompanied by the initialization of the information stored in the storage means (for example, RAM 203) and the initialization. There is no second return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 59-2 (5)), and the effect control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) has the plurality of movable units (for example, a left movable accessory). The first return (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 60-2 (5)) is performed on at least one movable portion of 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C), and the second It is moved by the same movement mode (for example, the movement mode of FIG. 60-2 (6)) as in the case where the return (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 59-2 (5)) is performed, and the plurality of movable portions (for example, the plurality of movable parts ( For example, the first return (for example, the initialization return in FIG. 60-2 (5)) is performed on at least one movable portion of the left movable accessory 115A, the middle movable accessory 115B, and the right movable accessory 115C). It is possible to operate in a different mode (for example, the mode of FIG. 60-2 (5)) depending on whether the second return (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 59-2 (5)) is performed. It is a feature.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has returned from the power off state.

◆ The fifth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following game machine. The gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) has a storage means for storing information about the game (for example, RAM 203) and the gaming machine recovers from the power off state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 59-1 (2)). In this case, a display means (for example, a display means (for example, a customer waiting image 65) for displaying a first image (for example, a stage image 61) and then displaying a second image (for example, a customer waiting image 65) different from the first image (for example, a stage image 61). For example, in a gaming machine provided with an image display unit 114), the first return (for example, FIG. 60) is accompanied by initialization of information stored in the storage means (for example, RAM 203). -2 (5) initialization return) and a second return without the initialization (for example, non-initialization return in FIG. 59-2 (5)), and the first return (for example, FIG. 60). -2 (5) initialization return) and the second return (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 59-2 (5)) are performed in the first image (for example, the non-initialization return). The total time from the display of the stage image 61) to the display of the second image (for example, the customer waiting image 65) (for example, the total time of the time T1, the time T2, the time T3, and the time T4 in FIG. 61). , Time T6, time T8, time T9, and time T10) are different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has returned from the power off state.

◆ The sixth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following game machine. This game machine (for example, the pachinko game machine 100) stores information about the game and a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition. A gaming machine including a storage means (for example, RAM 203), the storage means (for example, RAM 203) stores information related to the determination as hold storage, and the power of the gaming machine is turned off (for example, FIG. 60). The return from the state of -1 (2) is the first return accompanied by the initialization of the information stored in the storage means (for example, RAM 203) (for example, the initialization return of FIG. 60-1 (4)). ) And the second return (for example, FIG. 65-2 (5)), which is the return without the initialization and is the return when the hold storage is stored in the storage means (for example, RAM 203). There are cases where the first return (for example, the initialization return in FIG. 60-1 (4)) is performed, and the case where the second return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 65-2 (5)) is performed. When the initialization return) is performed, the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) from the return to the display of the predetermined image (for example, the decorative symbol 41) on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114). ) (For example, the display content of FIG. 60-1 (4) and the display content of FIG. 65-2 (5)) are different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has returned from the power off state.

◆ The seventh configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) holds a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition, and information on the determination. A gaming machine provided with a holding storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing, and for returning from the power off state of the gaming machine (for example, the state of FIG. 59-1 (2)), the holding storage means. The first return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 59-1 (4)), which is the return when the hold storage is not stored in the (for example, RAM 203), and the hold storage means (for example, RAM 203). There is a second return (for example, the non-initialization return in FIG. 65-2 (5)), which is the return when the hold memory is stored, and the first return (for example, FIG. 59-1 (for example, FIG. 59-1). In the case where the non-initialization return of 4) is performed and the case where the second return (for example, the non-initialization return of FIG. 65-2 (5)) is performed, the display means (for example, an image) is performed from the return. Display contents (for example, display contents of FIG. 59-1 (4) and FIG. 65) in the display means (for example, image display unit 114) until a predetermined image (for example, decorative symbol 41) is displayed on the display unit 114). -2 (5) display content) is different.
With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in which mode the gaming machine has returned from the power off state.

◆ The eighth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) holds a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition, and information on the determination. A gaming machine including a hold storage means (for example, RAM 203) capable of storing a predetermined number of memories and an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for performing an effect, wherein the effect control means (for example, an effect) is provided. When the game machine returns from the power off state (for example, the state of FIG. 65-1 (4)) when the hold storage is stored in the hold storage means (for example, RAM 203), the control unit 300) returns. A number of hold images (eg, FIG. 6) corresponding to the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means (for example, RAM 203) when the power is off (for example, the state of FIG. 65-1 (4)). The reserved image 52 of 65-2 (7) is displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), and then the displayed reserved image (for example, the reserved image 52) is moved and displayed (for example, FIG. 65-2). It is characterized in that the number of the reserved images (for example, the reserved image 52) is reduced in accordance with the display of (8).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who resumes the game from feeling uncomfortable after returning from the power off state of the game machine.

◆ The ninth configuration that achieves the above objectives is realized as the following game machine. The game machine (for example, the pachinko game machine 100) has a main control means (for example, a game control unit 200) that controls the progress of the game and a signal transmitted from the main control means (for example, the game control unit 200). A gaming machine including a sub-control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for controlling an effect, and the main control means (for example, a game control unit 200) is based on the establishment of a start condition. , It is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game, and a predetermined number of information related to the determination can be stored as reserved storage, and the sub control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) is the main control means (for example, the main control means (for example). A number of reserved images (for example, reserved images 52) corresponding to the number of reserved images stored in the game control unit 200) can be displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114), and the result of the determination is During the variable display of the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol 41) according to the above, the display means (for example, the image) displays an execution image (for example, the variable image 51) suggesting the content of the information regarding the determination related to the variable display during execution. It is possible to display on the display unit 114), and when the hold storage is stored in the main control means (for example, the game control unit 200), the game machine is in the power off state (for example, FIG. 65-1 (4)). When returning from the state), when the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol 41) is displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) (for example, in the case of FIG. 65-2 (7)), the execution image (for example) For example, the holding image (for example, the holding image 52) is displayed and displayed in response to the signal transmitted from the main control means (for example, the game control unit 200) without displaying the variable image 51). It is characterized in that the execution image (for example, the variable image 51) is displayed along with the moving display (for example, the display of FIG. 65-2 (8)) of the image (for example, the reserved image 52).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who resumes the game from feeling uncomfortable after returning from the power off state of the game machine.

◆ The tenth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 100) has a determination means (for example, a special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game in a game, and a display means (for example, an image) based on the establishment of a starting condition. A gaming machine including an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) that performs a variable effect of displaying a plurality of symbols (for example, a decorative symbol 41) on a display unit 114), and the effect control means (for example, , The effect control unit 300) starts the next variation effect of the executing variation effect when the gaming machine is not turned off during the execution of the variation effect determined to perform the special game (for example, The decorative symbol 41) is displayed according to a predetermined arrangement of symbols (for example, the arrangement of the decorative symbols 41 in FIG. 64-3 (18)), and the gaming machine performs the variable effect determined to perform the special game. When returning after the power is turned off (for example, the state shown in FIG. 67-1 (4)), the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol 41) that starts the next variation effect of the currently executing variation effect has a different symbol. It is characterized in that it is displayed by the arrangement including (for example, the arrangement of the decorative symbols 41 in FIG. 67-2 (15)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who resumes the game from feeling uncomfortable after returning from the power off state of the game machine.

◆ The eleventh configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) responds to the determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result of the determination. A gaming machine including an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) that performs an effect, and the effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) is a game machine that is operated during the execution of the special game. When the power is not turned off, a special effect image (for example, high-accuracy notification image 77) is displayed on the display means (for example, the image display unit 114) during the execution of the special game, and the gaming machine is displayed during the execution of the special game. Is restored after the power is turned off (for example, the state shown in FIG. 67-2 (10)), the special effect image (for example, the high-accuracy notification image 77) is not displayed during the execution of the special game. It is characterized in that an image different from the special effect image (for example, high-accuracy notification image 77) (for example, a right-handed image 83 during return) is displayed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who resumes the game from feeling uncomfortable after returning from the power off state of the game machine.

◇ The twelfth configuration that achieves the above object is realized as the following game machine. This gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 100) responds to the determination means (for example, the special symbol determination unit 234) for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result of the determination. The gaming machine is provided with an effect control means (for example, an effect control unit 300) for temporarily stopping and then stopping a variable display symbol (for example, a decorative symbol 41). The control means (for example, the effect control unit 300) puts the gaming machine into a power-off state (for example, the state shown in FIG. 67-1 (4)) during the execution of the variation effect when it is determined that the special game is to be performed. When returning after that, the variation effect being executed (for example, the variation effect of FIG. 67-1 (6)) is not temporarily stopped without temporarily stopping the symbol (for example, the decorative symbol 41) related to the variation effect being executed. ) Is terminated.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who resumes the game from feeling uncomfortable after returning from the power off state of the game machine.

41 ... Decorative design (an example of design)
51 ... Variable image (example of execution image)
52 ... Hold image (example of hold image)
61 ... Stage image (an example of the first image)
65 ... Customer waiting image (an example of the second image)
77 ... Highly accurate notification image (example of special production image)
100 ... Pachinko game machine (an example of a game machine)
110 ... Game board (an example of a game board)
111 ... Game area (example of game area)
114 ... Image display unit (example of display means)
115 ... Movable accessory (an example of movable accessory)
115A ... Left movable accessory (an example of a movable part)
115B ... Medium movable accessory (an example of a movable part)
115C ... Right movable accessory (an example of a movable part)
116 ... Board lamp (an example of the second light emitting unit)
150 ... Frame member (example of game frame)
157 ... Frame lamp (an example of the first light emitting unit)
161 ... Production button (example of operation means)
200 ... Game control unit (an example of main control means)
203 ... RAM (an example of storage means)
234 ... Special symbol determination unit (an example of determination means)
300 ... Production control unit (an example of production control means)

Claims (1)

Judgment means for determining whether or not to perform a special game based on the establishment of the starting condition,
A gaming machine provided with an effect control means for performing a variable effect of temporarily stopping and then stopping a symbol displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the determination.
The effect control means
When it is determined that the special game is to be performed and the game machine returns after the power is turned off during the execution of the variation effect, the symbol related to the variation effect being executed is executed without being temporarily stopped. A game machine characterized by ending the above-mentioned fluctuation effect inside.

Images